Alarm Monitoring Control and Power Management

AD-0377 / Item number 0400151 /

DataChief C20

Alarm and monitoring systemwith process control and

power managementInstruction manual

Document revisions

Rev Date Written by Checked by Approved by

A 02.02.2002 KGr AHo KOP

B 20.11.2002 KGr AHo KOP

C 05.02.2003 KGr BW KOP

D

The original signatures are recorded in the company’s logistic database.

High voltage safetywarning

The voltages used to power this equipment arepotentially lethal. Even 110 volts can kill.

Whenever possible, the following precautionarymeasures should be taken before any work iscarried out inside the equipment:

• Switch off all high-voltage power supplies.

• Check the operation of any door interlocksand any other safety devices.

• Completely discharge all high-voltagecapacitors.

It should be noted that interlocks and safetydevices are normally located only at regularaccess points, and high voltages may be exposedduring dismantling.

NEVER WORK ALONE ONHIGH-VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT!

FIRST AID IN THE EVENT OFELECTRIC SHOCK

Normally, even a high voltage electric shock will

not kill instantly. The victim can still be revived

even when his breathing and heart-beat have

ceased.

Could YOU save someone’s life? In the event of

electric shock, the correct actions, performed

quickly may well save the victim’s life. Makesure you know what to do!

Immediate action

While shouting for help, remove the source of

power from the victim. Switch off the supply ifpossible, or using a dry, non-conductive material

(rubber gloves, broom handle etc.) to insulate

yourself, separate the victim from the source. Ifthe voltage exceeds 1000 volts, switch off thesupply and be ready to catch the victim. Takecare- do not become a victim yourself.

Commence first aid on the spot. Continue to shoutfor assistance till someone arrives.

1 Lay the victim flat on his back and loosenany tight clothing (collar, tie, belt etc.).

2 Open his mouth and check for and removeany false teeth, chewing gum etc.

3 Check if the victim is breathing. If not,check if his heart is beating. The pulse isnormally easily found in the main arteries of theneck, either side of the throat, up under the chin.

If his heart is beating but he is not breathing,commence ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION. If the

victim’s heart is not beating, commence

EXTERNAL CARDIAC MASSAGE (ECM).Continue to shout for assistance till someone

arrives.

EXTERNAL CARDIAC MASSAGE

1 Kneel beside the victim. Place the heel ofone hand in the centre of his chest, at a positionhalf way between the notch between thecollar-bones at the top of his chest, and the dip inthe breast-bone at the base of his rib cage. Placethe other hand on top of the first.

2 Keeping the arms straight and using yourentire weight, press down rapidly so that thebreast bone is depressed four- five cm, thenrelease the pressure. Repeat rhythmically at a rateof one cycle per second. This will be hard work,

but keep going. His life depends on YOU. Do notworry about breaking his ribs - these will heal ifhe survives.

ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION1 Kneel besides the victim’s head. Place onehand under his neck and lift, allowing his head tofall back. This will lift his tongue and open the airpassage in his throat.

2 Place the palm of the hand on his foreheadto maintain the ”chin-up” position.

3 Using the index finger and thumb of thesame hand, pinch the victim’s nostrils closed.Open his mouth.

4 Take a deep breath and cover his mouthwith yours. Blow steadily into his lungs to expandhis chest. Remove your mouth from his to allowthe air to escape from his chest. You should beable to see his chest deflate.

5 Repeat the ”inflation-deflation” cycle at arate of about 12 cycles per minute till the victimbegins to breath normally again.

COMBINING EMC AND ARTIFICIALRESPIRATIONIf you are alone, perform ONE cycle of artificial

respiration for every FIVE cycles of EMC. This

will be hard work, but keep going. His lifedepends on YOU!

If there are other people available to help, one

should perform the EMC while one performs theartificial respiration for every five cycles of EMC.

It will be much more efficient with two people.

Once the victim’s heart is beating and he is

breathing, roll him onto his side and support him

in that position. As consciousness returns he mayvomit, and this will allow any liquid to drain out

of his mouth.

Remove the victim to a hospital as soon as

possible, but do not interrupt the artificial

respiration and EMC cycles till his heart beat andbreathing returns.

If started quickly and performed correctly, the

resuscitation methods described will keep a

sufficient volume of oxygenated blood flowingtrough the victims body to allow full recovery.

Proficiency in the resuscitation methods can onlybe achieved trough training. All personnel

concerned should attend courses on a regular

basis. Remember, someone’s life could depend onyou.

DO YOU KNOW WHAT TO DO?

Warnings and Cautions

WARNING Lethal voltages

This system is not fitted with safety interlocks and lethal voltagesmay be exposed when access covers are removed. Only personsqualified and authorised must remove covers and these personsshould always take extreme care once the covers are removed.

WARNING Fire

If a fire condition arises, emission of toxic fumes can be anticipatedfrom burning insulation, printed circuit boards, ETC.

WARNING Health hazard

When cleaning the inside of this system, do not inhale the dust. Thedust is a temporary health hazard, depending on individualallergies.

Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS disclaims anyresponsibility for damage or injury caused by improperinstallation, use or maintenance of the equipment.

Caution Electrostatic sensitive device

Certain semiconductive devices used in this equipment are liableto damage due to static voltage. Observe all precautions forhandling of semiconductive sensitive devices.

Note This document

The information contained in this document is subject to changewithout notice. Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS shall not beliable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequentialdamages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use ofthis document. 2002 Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS. Allrights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyrighthereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied without priorpermission from Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems AS.

Manufacturer Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems ASBekkajordet 8 AP.O. Box 1009N--3194 Horten, NORWAYTelephone switchboard: +47 33 03 20 00Fax: +47 85 02 80 82www.kongsberg.com

Purpose

The reader

This instruction manual describes how to use the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoringsystem with process control and power management controls and display facilities. It isintended for system operators. He/she should be experienced in the operation of Alarm andmonitoring system with process control and power management and have basic knowledgeof personal computers or should have attended a Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systemstraining course.

Note

Due to the flexible nature of DataChief C20 not all systems described in this manual arerelevant for all deliveries. DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with processcontrol and power management is a registered trademark of Kongsberg Maritime ShipSystems. Windows NT and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Figure 1 DataChief C20 Remote Operator Station

Instruction manual

IXAD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Chapters

1 Functional descriptionThis chapter presents a functional description of the DataChiefC20 Alarmand monitoring system with process control and power management..Refer to page 1.

2 Getting startedThis chapter teaches you how to use the basic control functions of theDataChiefC20. It is intended for personnel just starting to use the system.Refer to page 58.

3 Alarm and monitoring systemThis chapter contains step by step procedures for operation of the alarm andmonitoring system.Refer to page 82.

4 Process control systemThis chapter contains a full descriptions of the process control system for allall operator station types.Refer to page 150.

5 Power management systemThis chapter contains a full descriptions of the power management system forall operator station types.Refer to page 186.

6 Reference guideThis chapter contain software--related information that can be reached fromone or several different types of operator locations (ROS, LOS etc.) .Refer to page 214.

7 MaintenanceThis chapter explains how to keep the system in good working order and whatto do if the system fails.Refer to page 231.

8 Replaceable partsThis chapter contains a list of replaceable parts including part numbers.Drawings of the main units are found here.Refer to page 271.

9 AppendixThis chapter contains abbreviations and references.Refer to page 288.

DataChief C20 / Instruction manual

X AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Document historyThe information on this page is for internal use.

Rev.A First edition.

Rev.B Included 6 months and yearly maintenance, ShipViewer user informa-tion, how to use the service console, procedures for unit replacement,how alarms are printed after a blackout, how to configure a new DPUchannel and information about the new VCC, C3 and C4 Distributed Pro-cessing Units. Added section about password access. The manual is up-dated to comply with software version DC 60052.07.04.

Rev.C Updated section about power management (AD-0377 and AD-0379).Updated section about process control system (AD-0377 and AD-0378).Added information about the Midi operator station. Included variousminor changes and corrections. Reorganized normal operating informa-tion under thee main headings; Alarm and Monitoring, Process Controland Power Management System. Updated the parts lists.

Instruction manual

XIAD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Table of contents

1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1 Introduction 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 Overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3 Design principles 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.1 General 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.2 Building blocks 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.3 Decentralised system architecture 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3.4 Centralised operation 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4 System components 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.1 Remote Operator Station 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.2 Midi operator station 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4.3 Local operator station 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.4 Watch Bridge Unit 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.5 Watch Cabin Unit 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.6 ShipViewer 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.7 Distributed Processing Units 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4.8 Gateways 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5 Software components 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.1 Humane Machine Interface 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.2 System functions 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.3 Process control functions 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5.4 Power management system 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6 Technical specifications 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.6.1 Introduction 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.2 Operator Control Panel (OCP) 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.3 Midi Operator Station (MOS) 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.4 Local Operator Station (LOS) 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.5 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.6 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.7 Remote Analogue Input (RAi--16) 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.8 Remote Analogue Input (RAi--10tc) 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.9 Remote Digital Input (RDi--32 & RDi--32a) 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.6.10 Remote Analogue Output (RAo--8) 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.11 Remote Digital Output (RDo--16) 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.12 Remote Input/Output (RIO--C1) 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


XII AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.6.13 Remote Input/Output (RIO--C2) 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.6.14 Remote Input/Output (RIO--C3) 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.15 Remote Input/Output (RIO--C4) 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.16 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.17 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6.18 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 GETTING STARTED 58.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1 Introduction 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2 Using the Remote Operator Station 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.1 Understanding the Operator Control Panel 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.2 Systems without Operator Control Panel 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.3 Understanding the display 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 Using the Midi Operator Station 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.1 Overview 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.2 Understanding the keyboard 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.3 Understanding the display 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2.4 Menu overview 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4 Using the Local Operator Station 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4.1 Understanding the Local Operator Station 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4.2 Menu structure 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.3 How to access menus 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4.4 How to move between menu levels 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4.5 How to move inside a menu 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5 The watch calling system 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.1 Overview 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5.2 How does the Watch Calling repeat alarm feature work 76. . . . . . . . . . .2.6 Using the Watch Bridge Unit 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.1 Explanation of controls and indicators 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.2 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.3 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6.4 How to test the panel 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7 Using the Watch Cabin Unit 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.1 Explanation of controls and indicators 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.2 How to respond to alarms 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.3 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.4 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7.5 How to test the panel 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruction manual

XIIIAD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM 82.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1 Introduction 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2 Remote Operator Station 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.1 How to handle alarm events 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.2 How alarms are printed after a black--out 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.3 How to display alarm summary 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.4 How to display alarm history 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.5 How to display alarm group information 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.6 How to display counters and reset counters 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.7 How to display offscan alarms 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.8 How to toggle between group and alarm display 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.9 How to acknowledge alarms 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.10 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.11 How to print a Complete log 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.12 How to print an Alarm Summery log 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.13 How to print a Level Correction log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.14 How to print a Tank log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.15 How to print a Counters log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.16 How to print an Inhibit log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.17 How to print an Offscan log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.18 How to print Group log 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.19 How to print a Selected points log 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.20 How to stop a printout 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.21 How to display system information 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.22 About password access 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.23 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information 94. . . . . . . . . . .3.2.24 Info field enable 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.25 How to enable changing of Eng. unit/counts 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.26 How to enable resetting of counters 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.27 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.28 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves 97. . . . . . . . . .3.2.29 How to silence the Operator Control Panel buzzer 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.30 How to set tags to offscan 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.31 How to change alarm limits 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.32 How to change alarm delay 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.33 How to access the Watch Calling configuration 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineer 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


XIV AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.2.35 How to select the Watch Responsible location 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.36 How to call the On Duty engineer or All engineers 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.37 How to define the engineer qualifications 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.38 How to define watch calling Off--Duty mode 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.39 How to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers 105. . . .

3.2.40 How to change time zone 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.41 How to change system time 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.42 How to make your own list of selected tags 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.43 How to change a list of selected tags 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.44 How to set the interval for selected points log 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.45 How to make your own trend display 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.46 How to make your own bargraph display 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.47 How to change tag parameters for an analogue channel 117. . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.48 How to change tag parameters for a digital channel 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.49 How to change the Autolog 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.50 How to change Deviation parameters 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 Midi Operator Station 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.1 How to handle alarm events 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.2 How to display alarm history 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.3 How to display alarm summary 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.4 How to display alarm group information 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.5 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.6 How to change access level 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.7 How to display information about DPUs, tags and tag details 129. . . . . . .2.2.8 How to change tag parameters 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.9 How to change alarm limits 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2.10 How to change alarm delay 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4 Local Operator Station 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.1 How to view alarms 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.2 How to acknowledge alarms 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.3 How to turn the sound off 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4.4 How to display and interpret alarm history 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4.5 How to display and interpret alarm details 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.6 How to display alarm summary 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5 Watch calling system 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.1 How to receive a call 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.2 How to respond to alarms 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruction manual

XVAD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.5.3 How to call the ON DUTY engineer 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.4 How to transfer watch responsibility 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5.5 How to accept watch responsibility 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6 Watch Bridge Unit 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6.1 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode 140. . . . . . . . .

3.7 Watch Cabin Unit 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7.1 How to display alarm information when duty mode 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8 Using ShipViewer 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.1 Main ShipViewer functions 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8.2 Understanding the ShipViewer display 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.3 Explanation to the displays 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8.4 How to print displayed information 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8.5 How to save ShipViewer images 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.6 How to view saved mimic diagram files 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1 Introduction 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 About the process control system 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3 Remote Operator Station 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.1 How to operate a pump starter 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.2 How to operate a fan starter 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.3 How to operate a compressor 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.4 How to open or close valves 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.5 How to operate a PID controller 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4 Local Operator Station 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4.1 How to operate pumps or fans from the Local Operator Station 180. . . . .

4.4.2 How to operate valves from the Local Operator Station 183. . . . . . . . . . .

4 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1 Introduction 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 About the power management system 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3 Remote Operator Station 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.1 Overview 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.2 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control 188. . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.3 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control 193. . . . . . . . . .4.3.4 How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint

1944.3.5 How to operate the main switchboard controller 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


XVI AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

4.3.7 How to operate the one touch auto sequence 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 Midi Operator Station 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.1 Overview 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.2 How to operate the main switchboard controller 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2.3 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control 202. . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.4 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control 209. . . . . . . . . .3.2.5 How to operate a generator set without start, stop with adjustable load setpoint

2113.2.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 REFERENCE GUIDE 214.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1 Introduction 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2 Tag type overview 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.1 Basic tag types 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.2 Analogue out tags 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2.3 Relays 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 Alarm and monitoring parameters 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.1 Analogue input tag items 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.2 Alarm and event limits 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.3 Filter time 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.4 Dynamic deadband 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.5 Scaling parameters 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.6 Counter input tag items 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.7 Digital input tag items 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.8 Exhaust mean value tag items 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.9 Exhaust deviation tag items 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.10 Common submenu items 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3.11 Alarm submenu items 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4 Engineers safety 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.1 Functions 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.2 Local control 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.3 Remote Operator Station control 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.4.4 Parameters 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 MAINTENANCE 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1 Introduction 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2 Overview 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3 Unit replacement 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3.1 Recommended tools 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruction manual

XVIIAD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6.4 Preventive maintenance 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4.1 General 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4.2 Weekly maintenance 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4.3 6--monthly maintenance 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4.4 Yearly maintenance 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5 Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.1 How to use the Service console program 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.2 How to set up a Remote Operator Station from an image file 243. . . . . . .6.5.3 How to shut down a Remote Operator Station 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.4 How to replace colour graphics displays 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.5 How to replace printers 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.6 How to replace Operator Control Panels 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.7 How to replace Remote Operator Station PCs 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5.8 How to install the Remote Operator Station software 247. . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 How to install the Midi Operator Station 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2.1 Placement 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2.2 Cutout 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2.3 Electrical connections 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.1 Troubleshooting checklist 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3.2 How to replace Midi Operator Stations 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8 Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8.1 Troubleshooting flow diagram 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.8.2 How to replace Local Operator Stations 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.8.3 How to recommision a Local Operator Station 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9 Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.9.1 Troubleshooting flow diagrams 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.9.2 How to replace Watch Calling units 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10 Troubleshooting Distributed Processing Units 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.1 How to handle Distributed Processing Units error codes 262. . . . . . . . . . .6.10.2 How to handle Distributed Processing Units communication errors 263. .

6.10.3 How to start or stop Remote Operator Stations 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.4 How to configure a new DPU channel 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.10.5 How to replace Distributed Processing Units 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 REPLACEABLE PARTS 271.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1 Introduction 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2 How to get in touch with us 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


XVIII AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.3 Consumable spare Parts 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4 Modules 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5 Plugs and accessories 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.6 Other spare parts 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.7 Configuration settings 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.8 Drawings 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 APPENDIX 288.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1 Introduction 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 Abbreviations 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1 General 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.2 Alarm list abbreviations 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3 References 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Functional description

1AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1.1 IntroductionThis chapter introduces the DataChief C20 Alarm andmonitoring system with process control and power management.

The following subjects are covered:

- Overview

- Design principles

- System components

- Software components

- Technical specifications

1.1.1 Software versionThis manual complies with DataChief C20 software version DC60052.07.04.

Figure 2 Typical engine control room fitted withDataChief C20.


2 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.2 OverviewThe DataChief C20 is an Alarm and monitoring system withprocess control and power management. Modular design allowsflexibility in configuring the system to individual requirements,covering the whole range from low complexity alarm systems tohighly integrated alarm and monitoring systems with advancedprocess control. Sub-systems can include all or any combinationof the following:

• Alarm and monitoring system.

• Auxiliary control system.

• Power management system.

• Propulsion control.

• Ballast automation system.

• HVAC (air conditioning).

• Management support.

• Reefer monitoring

• Fire system

Note This document describes the DataChief C20 Alarm andmonitoring system with process control and power management.

The system is based on Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems unifiedautomation concept, where each individual ship configuration isbuilt up using standard modules communicating on CAN- andlocal area networks. DataChief C20 is configurable for all shiptypes, including oil and gas tankers, bulk carriers, passengervessels, container and Ro-Ro vessels, reefers and other specialpurpose vessels.

The main purpose of the system is to give ship’s officers all thebasic alarms and status information they require in order tomaintain safe and efficient operation of the machinery and otherrelevant equipment.

DataChief C20 complies with the requirements of IMO, localmaritime authorities, IACS, and eleven classification societies. Itis designed to meet the classification societies requirements forperiodically unmanned engine room operation. The systemconforms to all rules and regulations, and all modules are typeapproved. The system incorporates the latest advances in hardwareand software technology. DataChief C20 is developed to strictmilitary QA standards.


3AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.3 Design principles

1.3.1 General

Alarm groups

All alarms and monitored values are divided into alarm groups.Any alarm can only be part of one group. Each alarm group has adedicated button on the operator control panel. If only standardpersonal computer keyboard is provided the operator control panelis displayed on the colour graphics display and works in the sameway as the physical panel. Active alarms are indicated by a flashinglight (unacknowledged alarm) or steady light (acknowledgedalarm).

Alarm types

Alarm detection for analogue signals

The following functions are included:

• Instrument failure alarms.

• Low-low process alarms with or without action (slow-down).

• Low process alarms.

• High process alarms.

• High-high process alarms with or without action (slow-down).

• Return to normal detection with dead-band to avoid alarmfluctuations.

• Adjustable filter factors to filter fluctuations in the incomingsignals.

• Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages.

Alarm detection for on/off (two state) signals


• High process alarms (open or closed).

• Return to normal detection.


Alarm detection for on/off signals with line check


• High process alarms (open or closed).

• Line broken alarm.

• Line short alarm.


4 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Return to normal detection.


Inhibit alarm

Some alarms are conditional and will be inhibited when a specifiedcondition is present. This function is accomplished by defining asignal as an inhibit source for a specified alarm or a specified groupof alarms. An adjustable time delay is available to extend theinhibit situation for each signal.

Alarm indication

The four last alarms detected by the system will be indicated in thelower right corner of the colour graphics display. The alarm tag,description and state will be displayed. The following states areused by the system.

• On/off signal open contact alarm: OPEN

• On/off signal closed contact alarm: CLOSED

• On/off signal broken alarm: BROKEN

• On/off signal short alarm: SHORT

• Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside lowrange: IFL (Instrument Failure Low)

• Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outsidehigh range: IFH (Instrument Failure High)

• Analogue signal high alarm: HIGH

• Analogue signal low alarm: LOW

• Analogue signal high-high alarm: HI-HI

• Analogue signal low-low alarm: LO-LO

• On/off or analogue sensor taken out of scanning: OFFSC

• On/off or analogue signal return from alarm: RETURN

To visually distinguish between the alarm states different colourshave been used. The meaning of the different colours are listedbelow:

• Normal state: GREEN

• Alarm state, not acknowledged: RED with asterisk (*)

• State changed from not acknowledged to normal: RED

• Alarm state, acknowledged: YELLOW

• Alarm state, inhibited: BLUE

• Not updated or invalid values: GREY


5AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and monitoring displays

There are several display pages for presenting alarms andmonitored values. The alarm pages comprise:

• Alarm group display page (activated from group alarmpush-buttons).

• Alarm summary page, containing a list of all active alarms.

• Alarm history page, containing a consecutive list oftime-stamped alarms.

The monitoring pages include:

• Group display containing a list of all measuring points withinan alarm group.

• Selected points display (and logging facility).

• Tag details, giving detailed information about each measuringpoint in the system.

1.3.2 Building blocksThe DataChief C20 is a modular system that allows us to meetindividual ship owners requirements using standard modules. Themain building blocks of the DataChief C20 are:

• Distributed Processing Units: Their main functions are tomonitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue anddigital output to different devices. A number of differentDistributed Processing Units are available to meet specificcontrol and monitoring applications.

• Remote Operator Stations: Their main functions are toreceive alarms and to allow monitoring and control of thesystem. They can display mimic diagrams, allow control of theWatch Calling System and printing of various logs. They alsoenable the operator access to Distributed Processing Units forinspection of variables, local operation of equipmentadjustment of parameters etc.

• Local Operator Stations: Their main functions are to enablethe operator local access to Distributed Processing Units forinspection of variables, local operation of equipmentadjustment of parameters etc.

• Watch Bridge Units: Their main functions are to indicateengine room alarms on the bridge while in bridge control andto accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility to andfrom the bridge.

• Watch Cabin Units: Their main functions are to indicateengine room alarms in the engineer on duty’s cabin and in thepublic quarters while in bridge control.


6 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Dual redundant Local Area Network: Used forcommunication between the Remote Operator Stations andother PC based equipment. Each unit is connected to twocompletely separate Local Area Networks (LAN) formaximum redundancy.

• Dual redundant CAN-bus: Used for communication betweenthe Distributed Processing Units. Each unit is connected to twocompletely separate CAN-buses (CAN - Control AreaNetwork) for maximum redundancy.

• Dual Process Segment Controller: The dPSC is a dual twochannel CAN gateway. In most cases the two channels areworking in parallel on redundant CAN lines. The mainfunctions are to process messages from the a local CAN-bussegment and send them on the global process bus, where theyare available for other dPSC’s and System Gateways.

• Process Segment Starcoupler: Used to segment the CAN-busso that a short circuit or broken line in one segment will notaffect the functions in the other segments.

• System Gateway: Connects two CAN lines to two Local AreaNetwork lines. The main purpose is to receive messages fromthe two process buses running CAN, and update the RemoteOperator Station database.

Different selections of these units are used to configure eachindividual system. DataChief C20 is a fullymicroprocessor-based system. It is decentralised for safety andease of installation but operation is centralised using RemoteOperator Stations (ROS). Each or a group of DistributedProcessing Units can be connected to a Local Operator Station(LOS) containing display and keyboard for back-up/localoperation.

1.3.3 Decentralised system architecture

The heart of the system is a small family of different intelligent I/Ounits called Distributed Processing Units. These communicatewith each other on a redundant high capacity process-bus. Allmonitoring and automation functions are carried out by theDistributed Processing Units, while the centralised RemoteOperator Stations provide the Human Machine Interface.

Each Distributed Processing Unit type has a specific capacity innumber and type of analogue or digital input and output channels.The number of channels varies from 8 to 32.


7AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

To configure the tasks for a specific Distributed Processing Unitthe appropriate software and parameters are downloaded into theunit. This allows some Distributed Processing Units to performalarm functions, some control functions, some safety, or anycombination of these. This makes it easy to separate automationsystem functions.

The process-bus used for communication between the DistributedProcessing Units in the DataChief C20 is the Controller AreaNetwork (CAN) bus. The CAN-bus has a very high reliability. Forsystems with a high number of Distributed Processing Units or forother design reasons, System Gateways (SGW) may be added tothe CAN network. These units provide the necessary segregationof the automation system between for instance the differentsections of an alarm and monitoring system. The System Gatewaysdo not lower system performance or limit the possibilities forlocating operator stations.

The DataChief C20 is designed to accept both a “grounded” ora “floating” earth installation. The latter installation method isrequired by SOLAS Regulation 45 for some vessels types.Floating earth allows coexistence with other systems, and groundleakage detection.

DUAL LAN

LOSLOSLOS

WCU

WCU

WCU

WCU

WCU

WBU

START

PRINTERPRINTER

21”

Fleetmaster

UPS 220 VAC

MGE

VAC

ROS ROS ROS

UPS220 VAC

MGE

VAC

UPS220 VAC

MGE

VAC

UPS24 VDC

24 V

HUB

HUB

RESET

RESET

RESET

RESET

RESET

RESET

BUZZER

ROS

300 KW

PRINTER

DUAL CAN

dPSCGateway

ACCOMODATION WHEELHOUSE ENGINE CONTROL ROOM

PROCESS AREA

DUAL CAN

ROS

BUZZER

DPU

1--nn

INSTR.DRIV.

DPU

1--nn

INSTR.DRIV.

DPU

ROT. LIGHT/KLAXON

ROS

7 x 16 DPU CABINET W/dPSC

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

dPSC

2 x 16 DPU CABINET

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU


DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

dPSC

1 x 8 DPU CABINET

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

LOSLOSLOS


DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

dPSC

1 x 16 DPU CABINET

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU


DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

dPSC

1 x 8 DPU CABINET

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

Figure 3 Typical configuration drawing for a passenger vessel.


8 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

The Distributed Processing Units have been designed forimmunity against single failures. Each Distributed Processing Unithas an internal three way galvanic isolation between power,communication and input/output channels. If a unit fails this willnot affect the power source, communication bus or damage thesensors. The Built In System Test will detect the error and warn theoperator. Failures to the process-bus, cabling or connected sensorswill also be detected by the Built In System Test.

Exchange of a faulty Distributed Processing Unit can be donewithout turning the power off the DataChief C20. The procedureis simply to disconnect and remove the faulty unit and then mountand connect a replacement. The operator then requests the systemto replace the module, software is automatically downloaded andthe Distributed Processing Unit starts operating.

All Distributed Processing Unit types have been qualifiedaccording to the latest revision of the IACS E10 test procedure,satisfying the requirements for placement in the most demandinglocations. All Distributed Processing Units can be mounteddirectly on diesel engines or similar locations without shockabsorbers. Only Ingress Protection (IP) may be needed. TheDistributed Processing Units are CE marked as required for someEuropean Union flagstate vessels. They also meet therequirements to use the “Wheel Mark” defined by the EuropeanUnion Maritime Directive (EMD), satisfying all the newElectromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.

1.3.4 Centralised operation

DataChiefC20 is operated through a number of Remote OperatorStations. These are normally located in the Engine Control Room.Additional stations may be located in the wheelhouse, cargocontrol room, damage control room, ship’s office or other parts ofthe vessel. The Remote Operator Stations are normally connectedto the Distributed Processing Units trough a Dual RedundantControl Area Network.

The Remote Operator Stations are fitted with colour graphicdisplays and are operated either using a standard PC keyboard andmouse or through a purpose built Operator Control Panel.

The Remote Operator Stations provides the operator with anumber of standard display pictures containing information aboutthe engine and surrounding equipment. Control of any of theDistributed Processing Units can be performed from the RemoteOperator Stations. Full monitoring and alarm facilities areprovided in both machinery space and Engine Control Room.


9AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Advanced facilities can also be provided for unmanned machineryspace, and the watch-calling system allows automatic calling ofduty engineers. This allows both machinery space and enginecontrol room to be safely left unmanned, while the machinerywatch is carried out from the bridge.

All Remote Operator Stations are Windows based personalcomputers; type approved for maritime use. They work in parallel;none of them acts as master. All are interconnected via dualredundant local area network. Although every Remote OperatorStation is identical, access to vital functions may be configureddifferently. The control availability is defined by extensive use ofsoftware password access. Some Remote Operator Stations suchas units located in the ship office are normally used for monitoringonly. These units will not allow acknowledgement of alarms orexecution of control commands. All general information such asmonitoring of alarms, trends and graphics are available forinspection.

Changing a limit or parameter on one Remote Operator Stationwill automatically update all other stations. All operator actionssuch as the starting or stopping of a pump or the changing of analarm limit are logged and time tagged (optional).

When ever a variable or state changes significantly the DistributedProcessing Units updates the database in each of the RemoteOperator Stations. This means that data displayed at any RemoteOperator Station is always up-to-date. There is no need to requestdata each time the operator wishes to inspect a variable. As a resultof this, the data traffic on the process bus and the Local AreaNetwork is kept to a minimum, giving extremely fast data access.

The Remote Operator Station serves as the database host forprocess data, engineering data and software. Software for RemoteOperator Stations and the different Distributed Processing Unitsare stored here. They include functions for automatic downloading of parameters to the Distributed Processing Units atcommissioning time or when a Distributed Processing Unit isreplaced.

Configuration control of DataChief C20 systems is taken care ofby an automatic version update at any change of the engineeringdatabase or the application software. The system logs all changesmade. Version numbers and additional information can at any timebe individually inspected for each DataChief C20, as required bythe major classification societies. Our commissioning editor“Tools” is used to configure or modify the functionality of theDataChief C20 and is used to generate ”as built documentation”.


10 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

The local area network included as part of DataChief C20 caninterface with personal computers for remote monitoring and evenwith other external computer systems. The following drawingsgives a configuration example:

WCU

WBU

UPS220 VAC

MGE

VAC

RESET

RESET

RESET

RESET

BUZZER

DUAL CAN

ACCOMODATION WHEELHOUSE ENGINE CONTROL ROOM

PROCESS AREA

BUZZER

DPU

ROT. LIGHT/KLAXON

UPS24 VDC

24 V

PRINTER

UPS24 VDC

24 V

LOS

DPU

1--nn

INSTR.DRIV.

DPU

1--nn

INSTR.DRIV.

START

WCU 16 group

WCU 16 group

WCU 16 group

WCU 16 group

WCU 16 group

WCU 16 group

WCU 16 group

WCU 16 group

ROS

300 KW

CHIEF ENGINEER ROOM

21”

Fleetmaster

N x 4 DPU CABINET

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPUN x 3DPU CABINET

DPU

DPU

DPU

N x 3DPU CABINET

DPU

DPU

DPU

N x 3DPU CABINET

DPU

DPU

DPU

Figure 4 Configuration drawing for an oil tanker.


11AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.4 System componentsThe following pages contains a description of each of the mainsystem components of the DataChief C20 Alarm and monitoringsystem with process control and power management.

The following system components are described:

- Remote operator station

- Local Operator Stations

- Watch Bridge Unit

- Watch Cabin Unit

- Distributed Processing Units

- Gateways


12 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.4.1 Remote Operator Station

Figure 5 Remote Operator Station (ROS)

The Remote Operator Station is a type approved personalcomputer, connected to a colour graphics display and a printer.Operator input is either done through a standard personal computerkeyboard or through our custom made Operator Control Panel.

The Operator Control Panel is a specially designed keyboard thatprovides easy access to the different operator functions. It isdivided into separate function areas. Buttons are combined withlamps to indicate alarms, status of the Extended Alarm System andto indicate main system functions. The Operator Control Panel isin many cases connected to an external ”sound off” button.

The Remote Operator Station can be supplied with a printer (foron demand printing), an alarm printer, log printer or colour hardcopy unit. When a Distributed Process Unit detects an alarmcondition, the alarm is identified by a flashing indicator on theOperator Control Panel. The alarm is also displayed on the colourgraphics display, a buzzer is turned on and the Alarm Printerautomatically prints the alarm. By pressing the button associatedwith the flashing indicator more detailed alarm information isdisplayed on the colour graphics display.


13AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Detailed sensor information for any Distributed Process Unit, suchas alarm or normal status data, can also be shown on the colourgraphics display, or printed on demand. Analogue sensor data canbe presented as a bargraph or a trend curve. Selected sensor datamay be printed automatically at fixed intervals. The system candisplay the latest alarms for each alarm group individually or allactive alarms.

The logging printer and the colour graphics display records allstatus changes, such as alarm acknowledgements and alarmcondition cleared. When all alarm conditions are cleared, thesystem returns to normal.

Alarm limits and delays are adjustable from the Operator ControlPanel. A counter function keeps track of running hours for engines,pumps and related items. This function can also accumulate flow.Counter values are shown on the colour graphics display or maybe printed.

The Remote Operator Station is used when transferring machinerywatch responsibility between bridge and engine control room.Selecting the engineer for watch-call duty is carried out from here,and all available engineers, whether on duty or not, may be calledto the engine control room in the case of an emergency.


14 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.4.2 Midi operator station

Figure 6 Midi Operator Station (MOS).

The Midi Operator Station is a multipurpose operator stationdesigned to be placed anywhere on the ship, even out on deck. Itallows alarm indication, process control and power management.Operation is performed through a set of function keys and a highresolution colour graphical display. For small alarm systems it canbe the only operator station. The Midi Operator Station containsa symbol library for presentation of process control equipment anduse these to display mimic diagrams. The Midi Operator Stationgives the operator the possibility to:

• Monitor the status of any object, from a single input signal toa controllable object.

• Be informed of any process- or system alarm, through visualand audible signals.

• Interface to a printer for alarm loging purposes.

• Control the process through built-in pushbuttons and graphicalfeedback.

• Reconfigure the distributed database located in the DistributedProcessing Units, through numeric and alphanumeric inputs.


15AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.4.3 Local operator station

Figure 7 Local Operator Station (LOS).

The Local Operator Station is an optional operator control panel.It includes a four line by 40 characters Liquid Crystal Display(LCD display) and push-buttons for operator interaction. It is usedto allow local access to the Distributed Processing Units forinspection of process variables, local operation of equipment,simulation of input/output signals, adjustment of parameters andinspection of the built-in diagnostics.

All Distributed Processing Units connected to the same CAN-busas theLocalOperatorStation areaccessible.Assoon asconnectionis established, the Local Operator Station is able to control theselected Distributed Processing Unit.Thedialoguesaredefinedbythe functionality of each individual type of Distributed ProcessingUnit.

If a Distributed Processing Unit is isolated from the rest of thesystem because of a communication break-down, or because theRemote Operator Station has developed a serious fault, all thenecessary alarm and monitoring functions can as an option beavailable locally. Detailed information on the type of alarm and itssource is then available at the Local Operator Station.


16 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.4.4 Watch Bridge Unit

Figure 8 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LCD type.

Two different types of Watch Bridge Units exist, an LED and aLCD type. Both are used to indicate and accept the transfer ofmachine watch responsibility between bridge and engine controlroom. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD typehas a display to show alarms in clear text.

Figure 9 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LED type.


17AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one ormore engineers must be on call. A general alarm signal will callthem to the engine control room if an alarm condition arises. Thealarm indication on the Watch Bridge Unit is that a buzzer soundsand a single or group alarm lamp is flashing. When an alarm isacknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation iscleared, appropriate indications are given on the Watch BridgeUnit.

The DataChief C20 prevents the bridge from assuming watchresponsibility if no engineers are assigned to on call duty. Thebridge personnel may call the engineers on-duty in their quartersat any time, for consultation etc. Acknowledgement of such callsare provided.

Alarm indication can be provided when the bridge is not having themachinery watch. Indicators show when an alarm has beenacknowledged in the engine control room but the buzzer is notsounded.

1.4.5 Watch Cabin Unit

Figure 10 Watch Cabin Unit (WBU), LCD type.

Two different types of Watch Cabin Units exist, an LED and aLCD version. Both are used to indicate engine room alarms. Theyare placed in the engineers cabins and in public areas. The LEDtype has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display toshow alarms in clear text.

To set the machinery watch responsibility system to bridge modeone or more engineers must be on call. When an alarm conditionarise a general alarm signal is sounded in the duty engineers cabinsand in the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the WatchCabin Unit consists of single or group alarm lamps.


18 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 11 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU), LED type.

When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one ormore engineers must be on call. When an alarm situation occur thealarm signal will be given, both in the duty-engineers cabin and inthe public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch CabinUnits are that a buzzer sounds and a single or group alarm lamp isflashing. The engineer will then normally go to the engine controlroom to find the cause of the alarm. When the alarm isacknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation iscleared, the alarm condition is cleared from the Watch Cabin Units.If the engineer does not acknowledge within a specified period oftime, the alarm signal is repeated in the engineers’ quarters, and onthe bridge, until it is acknowledged. The system can also be usedto call an engineer to the bridge or the engine control room withoutan alarm condition. Alarm indication without sounding the buzzeris configurable when the Watch Calling System is in off-dutymode.


19AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.4.6 ShipViewerShipViewer is a software package that runs on a standard personalcomputer connected to the DataChief C20 local area network.The computer can be installed anywhere on the ship. It has similarviewing capabilities as those found in the Remote OperatorStation, but no control functions. The following systems can bemonitored through ShipViewer dependent on the systemconfiguration:

• Engine monitoring and control system

• Power management system

• Fire system

• Tank system

The system presents online data, mimic diagrams, logged data andallows convenient printing facilities. It is a useful tool to avoidmisunderstanding and lack of information.

Functions

• Presentation of logged ship data and mimic diagrams.

• Presentation of alarms.

• Presentation of alarm history.

• Status on open/closed valves, running/stopped equipment etc.


20 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.4.7 Distributed Processing Units

General

A number of different Distributed Processing Units are availablefor different tasks. The main functions of the DistributedProcessing Units are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and toprovide analogue and digital output to different devices. All unitshave the same mechanical construction and are built using thesame electronic design principles. The main characteristics of theDistributed Processing Units are:

Figure 12 Distributed Processing Units (DPU)

• LED indicators on the housing for Watch-dog, Run, Generalinformation, unit initialised and power polarity.

• Three-way isolation between:

- I/O and power.

- I/O and process-bus.

- Power and process-bus.

• Single printed circuit board design.

• Easy service replacement without setting trimmers, dipswitches, jumpers or sockets.

• No additional EMC protection required (only IP).

• Time synchronisation.

• Non-volatile memory.

• Remote alarms function.

• Dual CAN-bus interfaces.

• Software can be downloaded into the unit.


21AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Built In Self-Test (BIST) monitoring temperature, power andsensor excitation overload.

• All parameters are stored in each unit.

• Each unit is remotely configurable.

• No serviceable parts inside.

• All connections are plugable.

Each Distributed Process Unit contains its own microprocessor.These are programmed for a number of different tasks such asdetecting when a monitored signal move outside set limits.Unwanted alarms are inhibited during start-up and shut-down ofthe machinery. Status information is continuously monitored bythe DataChief C20’s Remote Operator Stations through thesystem network.

When an unacceptable condition is detected, the DistributedProcess Unit and DataChief C20 generates an alarm signal,identifies the responsible sensor, and provides information aboutthe condition. The following gives a short description of eachDistributed Processing Unit type:

Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16)

This unit has 16 analogue input channels. Each channel isselectable as voltage, current and resistance input in differentranges and has free technical units scaling. It also incorporates a5-500Hz counter channel. The main features are:

• 16 analog or digital input channels.

• Scaled in technical units.

• 1 Counter 5 - 500 Hz.

• Limit check.

• Alarm and monitoring for all channels.

• Trend.

• Time stamp of alarms and events (0.001 seconds).

• Self checking.

• Sensor excitation power overload.

• CAN net status, error handling.


22 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc)

This unit has 10 analogue input channels. It is used for temperaturemeasurements with Thermo Coupler (TC) elements of differenttype. It is particularly suited to monitor engine exhausttemperatures. A large variety of temperature elements can beconnected, with ranges ± 50, ± 200, 0 to + 600_C. A Cold JunctionCompensation function is included. If external compensation isneeded, the use of external Thermo Coupler amplifiers and RAi-16is recommended. The main features are:

• 10 thermo-coupler input channels.

• Scaled in technical units.

• Limit check.


• Trend.

• Time stamp of alarms and events.

• Self checking.



Remote Digital Input (RDi-32 and RDi-32a)

These units have 32 digital input channels/dry contacts andincludes LED status indicators. The main features are:

• 32 digital input channels with LED status indicators.

• Input dry contacts.


• Trend.


• Self checking.



Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)

This unit has 8 analogue output channels. Each channel isselectable for voltage or current output in different ranges andalmost free technical units scaling. This module is suited to driveanalogue indicators. By placing the module close to instrumentslong cables can be avoided. The main features are:

• 8 analog output channels.


23AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• ± 10VDC / ±20 mA.


Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)

This unit has 16 digital output channels and includes LED statusindicators. The maximum output current for each channel is 3Amperes (resistive load). Maximum voltage is 230 VAC. The mainfeatures are:· 16 digital output channels with LED status indicator.The main features are:

• Change over, brake before make relay-contacts.

• Pulse on output.

• Pulse off output.


Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)

The RIO-C1 is a highly flexible input/output DistributedProcessing Unit. It is particularly suited for electric generatorcontrol, main engine or auxiliary engine safety systems.

The unit is equipped with four input channels, which can beindividually configured to handle both analogue and digitalsignals. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect theelectronics against damage.

The unit can connect to single-phase AC voltage and a currentsignal. Based on these signals the following values can bemeasured and calculated:

• AC voltage available from generator and busbar.

• AC current supplied from the generator.

• AC frequency of generator and busbar.

• Phase angle between AC voltages, for synchronising circuitbreakers.

• Phase angle between AC voltage and current, for calculatingreactive load, kVAr.

• Active load calculation based on AC voltage, current and phaseangle.

The unit can be connected to dual pick-ups, measuring rotatingspeed of any machinery, in the speed range of 0 – 1500 Hz. The twoanalogue output channels can drive any indicator by either voltageor current.

The unit can further control six digital output channels (2-polerelay (normal open/normal closed) or solenoid valve driver withbuilt-in loop fail detection facilities.


24 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Number ofchannels

Function Level

6 Digital output Solenoid valve driver or relay,max 3 A resistive load

2 Analogue output mA

2 Analogue input.ACV (1--phase)

Max. 30Vrms, 50/60 Hz

1 Analogue input.AC current

Max. 1A, 50/60 Hz

4 Analogue/digitalinput, flexible

As RAi--16

2 Input from pick-up

24VDC (counter input)

4 Digital input As RDI-32

Table 1 RIO-C1 Process connections.

The main features are:

• 21 analog or digital, input and output channels with LED statusindicator.


• Trend.


• Self checking.



Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2)

The RIO-C2 is a combination module for digital inputs andoutputs. The unit is equipped with eight digital input channelswhich are galvanically isolated between the sensor signals. Thedigital input sensor can be either a potential free contact (switch)or an external 24VDC or 24VAC signal. Each channel has anelectronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage. When thefaulty sensor interface has returned to normal, the electronic fuseis automatically reset. The unit can control eight digital outputchannels, 2-pole relays (normal open/normal closed). It isparticularly suited for control of pumps and valves. The mainfeatures are:

• 8 input and 8 output channels with LED status indicator.

- 8 channels relays change over, brake before make.

- 8 channels digital inputs, with possibility for 24VDC liveinput or dry contacts.


25AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


• Trend.


• Self checking.


CAN net status, error handling.

Process Segment Starcoupler

The CAN line is vulnerable against short circuit and unterminatedlines. A short-circuit or a broken line will disable the entire CANsegment. The Process Segment Starcoupler protects two sectionsof a CAN segment from each other.

Each terminal on the Process Segment Starcoupler is based on theISO 11898 standard, with optical isolation. The Process SegmentStarcoupler also protects the terminals against dominant bits thatare not part of a CAN message. Thus short-circuit or malfunctionon one CAN terminal does not affect the other CAN terminals.

The maximum length of one CAN segment at 125kBaud is 530m.A segment going through a Process Star Coupler is limited to515m. This length is the maximum line length between any twonodes in the CAN segment. For that reason it is advised to use theProcess Segment Starcoupler to split two sections of a processsegment, where the segment is running through roughenvironment or fire zones.

Voltage converter controller (VCC)

The VCC-440 module is designed for use in main switchboards.The module secures the installation of the power management andgenerator protection system, by transforming the higher voltagesto low and safe levels. The VCC-440 module is equipped with sixvoltage transformers to transform from 440 to 24 VAC. Themodule handles three major tasks:

• Supply the C3 generator protection module with AC voltagefrom the measured three phase generator bus bars, L1-L2,L1-L3 and L2-L3, derated from 440 to 24 VAC.

• Supply the C3 generator protection module with 24VDC power(1A), using the generator busbar (L2-L3) as source.

• Supply the C4 power management module with a single phaseAC voltage from the generator busbar L1-L2 and theswitchboard busbar L1-L2, derated from 440 to 24 VAC.

As an option, the VCC module can be equipped with transformersfor 690 VAC.


26 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Generator monitoring and control (C4)

The C4 module is designed for control of marine generators andbustie breakers. The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing tovoltage and current transformers, as well as switchboardequipment.

• Synchronize and connect of generator CB.

• Synchronize and connect of bustie CB.

• Start and stop of auxiliary diesel engine.

• RPM set point control of auxiliary diesel engine.

• Optional control of primer pump for AE.

• Optional control of fuel selection for AE.

• Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr).

• Driving MSB instruments (kW, kVAr).

• Load sharing between generators.

• AVR set point control (optional).

Generator protection (C3)

The C3 module is designed for protection of marine generators.The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage andcurrent transformers as well as switchboard equipment. Themodule has a 7-segment display trip indicator, to be independentof external indicators. The C3 module is available in two versions:

• C3-GP: Generator Protection

• C3-GDCP: Generator & differential current protection

The module has a dual 24VDC power connection, to uniterruptiblepower supply and generator voltage.

• Short circuit tripping of generator CB.

• Over current tripping of generator CB.

• Reverse power tripping of generator CB.

• Optional differential current protection.

• Local indication of reason for trip.

• Local reset of tripping.

• Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr).

• Calculation of phase angel between voltage and current (cosineϕ).

1.4.8 Gateways

General

Two types of gateways are available.


27AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• The System Gateway: Used as a redundant gateway betweenCAN-bus and Local Area Network.

• The dual Processing System Controller: Used as a redundantgateway between two CAN segments (sections of theCAN-bus).

The main purposes of both units are to provide galvanic isolationbetween different parts of the network and to segregate process bustraffic in large systems. Messages are then converted between thenetwork parts, while maintaining redundancy.

Both units provide a service to protect all nodes (DistributedProcessing Units, Watch Bridge Unit, Watch Cabin Units andLocal Operator panels) connected to the CAN-bus. If thecommunication with one node fails, the gateways will generate asystem failure message identifying the node and the failure. TheDual Process System Controller may also be equipped withsupervisory control logic for particularly demanding tasks.

The System Gateway – SGW

The System Gateway is a four channel CAN-bus to dual LocalArea Network gateway. Its main task is to receive messages fromthe two CAN-buses, and update the Remote Operator Stations.Handling of operator commands and downloading of parametersand software from the Remote Operator Stations to the nodes(Distributed Processing Units and Local Operator Stations) arehandled as well.

The System Gateway will route global CAN-bus messagesbetween the four CAN-buses. Global messages are data messagesneeded in more than one bus segment, typically messages forinhibiting or blocking alarms during start-up or shut-down.

The System Gateway functions as an intelligent message convertersending and receiving data between any of its CAN channels andunits having Process Data Segment located on the Local AreaNetwork. The converter function will pre-process CAN messagesand load them into a local database for distribution. The other waythe converter will convert messages from Process Data Segmentand route them to the relevant node (Distributed Processing Units,or Local Operator panels).

All necessary configuration and software installation is donethrough the Local Area Network. The Simple NetworkManagement Protocol is implemented to gain access via the LocalArea Network to System Gateway and CAN diagnostic databases.Galvanic isolation is provided between the 24V power input andthe System Gateway interfaces.


28 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC)

The dual Process Segment Controller is a dual two channel CANgateway. It consist of two processors, each with two CANinterfaces. The two processors have separate power connections,and they share information via dual port memory.

In this way the two processors are able to run in parallel andprovide redundancy both for CAN-bus communication and forlogic functions. The main function is to process messages from thelocal CAN-bus segment and send them on the global CAN bus,where they are available for other dual Process SegmentControllers and System Gateways. It handles operator commandsand downloading of parameters and software from any SystemGateway or Remote Operator Station to the Distributed ProcessingUnits connected to the local CAN-bus.

When the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling a set ofDistributed Processing Units, both processors are working inparallel running the same process algorithm. In this function thedual Process Segment Controller operate as a running back-up.

The dual Process Segment Controller is equipped with a dual serialinterface (RS422/485), primarily designated to communicate withother manufacturers equipment. Galvanic isolation is providedbetween the power connections and the CAN-bus, and between thetwo CAN-buses. The main features are:

• Dual two channel CAN gateway with separate and galvanicisolated processors.

• Possible to power the two processors from separate powersupplies.

• High speed data-link between the two processors.

• A node with CANopen master capability on all four CANchannels.

• Redundant routing of messages between local and global CANsegments.

• Dual serial interface, galvanic isolated, RS422/485 tocommunicate with other vendors equipment.

• Various redundant application process control logic. When thetwo processors in the dual Process Segment Controller iscontrolling the same Distributed Processing Units they areworking in parallel running the same process algorithm.


29AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.5 Software components

1.5.1 Humane Machine Interface

Operator control panel

The Operator Control Panel is either available as a dedicated panelor displayed and operated from the colour graphics display usinga standard PC keyboard and mouse. The Operator Control Panelinclude the following main functions:

• Alarm display selection and acknowledgement.

• Selection and set-up of information to be monitored.

• Set-up and activation of logging (printing).

• Parameter adjustment.

• Extended Alarm and watch-calling functions.

When only monitoring facilities are required the panels controlfunctions can be inhibited.

Figure 13 Remote Operator Stations.

Alarm and monitoring display

A number of display windows are available for presenting alarmsand monitored values. Alarm windows include:

• Alarm group display (activated by the group alarmpush-buttons).

• Alarm summary, containing a list of all active alarms messages.

• Alarm history, containing a continuous list of time-stampedalarm messages.


30 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Monitoring windows include:

• Group display containing a list of all measuring points withinan alarm group.

• Information display for a selected point.

• Tag details giving detailed information about each measuringpoint in the system.

Process mimics, bargraphs & status displays

The system can include (as an option) a number of standard displaypictures for common information from the engine and surroundingequipment. The standard mimic windows are:

• Exhaust gas temperatures and average temperature bar graph.

• Bar graphs.

• Trend curves.

In addition, customised mimic diagrams will be designed for eachproject according to the piping diagrams. These display windowsshow the status of the equipment (open/closed, running/stopped,% filling etc.) and are interactive, allowing operation of theequipment.

Logging/hard copy

All logs can be printed on request. The autolog and the selectedpoints log can also be configured to print at specified intervals. Thefollowing logging function are available:

• Alarm log (time stamped alarm and return to normal).

• Selected points log.

• Complete log.

• Group log.

• Inhibited points log.

• Autolog.

All alarms are printed in red. A separate deskjet printer can befitted to print mimic display windows as an option.

Self-checking and diagnostics

The Distributed Processing Unit’s have an on-line Built InSelf-Test (BIST) system, that monitors the units temperature,power, and sensor excitation.

Testing of the Remote Operator Stations and their ability to givealarms according to the requirements, is initiated by pushing the“alarm test” push-button on the Operator Control Panel. Inaddition, the electronics is automatically tested when power isturned on.


31AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Access control

In order to limit or enable control of the process from any RemoteOperator Station an advanced passwords system is available .Changes of limits or parameters are also guarded through the useof passwords. All operator actions can be logged with time tags(optional).


32 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.5.2 System functions

Alarm block

Some of the alarms are conditional and will be blocked when aspecified condition is present. For instance when the main engineis stopped the lubrication oil pressure falls and should normallyhave triggered an alarm condition. Since this is quite normal thealarm is blocked. This function is started by defining a signal as aninhibit signal for a specified alarm or a specified group of alarms.An adjustable time delay for each signal is available to extend theblocking situation.

Alarm acknowledge

It is possible to acknowledge alarms while a mimic window, alarmgroup or alarm summary is displayed. Alarm acknowledgementfor separate or group alarms displayed on the screen is donethrough a single push of the same pushbutton.

Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring

The DataChief C20 exhaust gas monitoring system calculates thedeviation between the individual cylinders and the average valueof all cylinders. An alarm is given if the deviation exceeds theacceptable limit. Alarm limits are continuously calculated basedon the engine load. The deadband is set narrower as the engine loadincreases. Individual variations due to different exhaust piping andsensor locations for each cylinder are taken into account.

Individual calculations for each cylinder bank are when relevantmade. The maximum number of cylinder for each engine orcylinder bank is 12. As the average temperature is used as referencefor the deviations, it is necessary to correct the temperature of eachcylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference.This correction is done when running the engine at full load. Whenthe average temperature is below a preset value, the deviationalarm is blocked.

Trend monitor

The DataChief C20 automatically records selectedmeasurements, and store them for use in the trend monitoringsystem. This system can present recorded data for all variables ascurves. The trend monitor is part of the Remote Operator Station.Two functions are available; “Select Trend” and “Display Trend”.

The “Select Trend” function assigns the display of trend curves tospecified variables. The operator can specify five different trenddisplays with eight variables each, giving a total of forty recordedvariables display.


33AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

The “Display Trend” function displays the selected trend ascontinuous curves. The present value is at the right hand side of thedisplay window while the previous values are displayed towardsthe left. Each curve has an assigned colour.

The trend display gives tag name, tag description and thenumerical actual value of eight variables at a time.

Fuel performance system (optional)

The fuel economising system is a tool to monitor fuel consumptionand assess the efficiency of the propulsion machinery. To studyperformance parameters momentary values are available.Accumulated fuel consumption and propeller shaft power such asfor a voyage can be displayed and printed for reporting.

Calculations are based on the Distributed Processing Units makingcontinuous measurements. The following sensor data are required:

• Fuel oil flow for each propulsion engine.

• Both input and output flow must be measured.

• Fuel oil temperature for all input and output flows.

• Running signal for each propulsion engine.

• Shaft power (torque) for each propeller shaft.

• Ship speed.

Based on these measurements the following performanceparameters are calculated:

• Momentary fuel consumption for each engine in kg/hrs.

• Total momentary fuel consumption in kg/hrs.

• Hull efficiency in kg/nm.

• Engine efficiency for each engine in g/kWh.

• Shaft power for each shaft in MW.

• Total shaft power in MW.

Fuel consumption and power output is calculated over the voyageperiod. Accumulated data includes:

• Duration of voyage in hours.

• Distance travelled in nautical miles.

• Accumulated fuel consumption for each main engine in tons.

• Total accumulated fuel consumption in tons.

• Accumulated propeller shaft power in for each shaft in MWh.

• Total accumulated propeller shaft power in MWh


34 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Accumulated values can be reset by the operator. When doing so,the accumulated values are printed (a post voyage report). All fueleconomising measurements and calculations are available as adisplay window on any of the Remote Operator Stations.

Running hours & counters

To improve the maintenance plan and to decide which componentsneeds overhauling, it is important to know the running hours foreach component. The DataChief C20 running hours functionkeeps track of the running hours for selected pumps, fans,compressors, purifiers & generators etc., and present the result tothe operator on demand.

Any status signal interfaced to the DataChief C20 can be used tocount running hours. Two separate counter functions are available:

• Counter for total active running hour.

• Lap counter.

A table containing all parameters and their running hour valuescanbe printed on demand. Values can be manually reset when unitshave been overhauled. When required, adjustments can be madeto the total running hour or lap counter for any unit.


35AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.5.3 Process control functionsAll data acquisition, signal conditioning, signal scaling andprocess control is performed by each individual DistributedProcessing Unit. This solution guarantees that local operation isavailable even if the Remote Operator Stations are not functioning.

Stand by pumps

General

Pump control is located in the Distributed Processing Unit’s.Remote control is available from the Remote Operator Stations intwo ways:

• Through the stand by pump mimic diagrams.

• Through a mimic diagram included in the monitoring andcontrol system.

Stand by start at low pressure

When the pressure drops below the set limit the stand by pumpautomatically starts. The limit may be adjusted if an analoguesensor is used.

Inhibit stand by start

Starting of the stand by pump is blocked after a blackout or at agroup start, until the pressure has built up. The stand by logic canalso be inhibited by an external condition, such as “main enginestopped”, “aux engine stopped” or a similar condition.

Restart after blackout

Some units have to be automatically restarted after a blackout.These units are included in a start sequence. The delay time definedin the Distributed Processing Units pump logic determines the startsequence. The operator can adjust the sequence timing.

Group start of pumps

Remote controlled pumps can be started in sequence.

Alarms from the stand by pump logic

• Stand by start alarm.

• Auto start fail or trip.

• Non stand by alarm (indicates that a stopped pump is no longerin stand by mode).

Sensors: Pressure switches or analogue sensors may be used forthe control functions.

Limits: All limits are downloaded from the remote OperatorStation as part of its database. Limits may be adjusted from RemoteOperator Station or at the Local Operator Station.


36 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Configuration: To maintain redundancy in a two or three pumpsystem, the signals from the motor starters and the process arenormally routed to different Distributed Processing Unit’s. Thisconfiguration allows the system to work even if one of theDistributed Processing Unit fails. The stand by pump logic is alsoactive when the Remote Operator Station is down.

Valve control

General

Valve control is located in the Distributed Processing Unit’s.Remote control is available from the Remote Operator Stationsthrough mimic diagrams.

Valve Types

Single Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by one digitaloutput signal. The valve-position (closed or open) is given by thesignals by one or two limit switches.

Double-Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by two digitaloutput and two input signals. The valve is opened or closed bypulsing a relay.

Double-Acting Valve with Position Control: This valve type iscontrolled by two digital outputs; two digital inputs and an analoginput signal. The valve position is set within a defined dead bandby pulsing a relay.

Additional functions

In addition, the following functions are available as part of thevalve control system.

• Pulsed output.

• Automatic closing of a set of valves.

• Automatic opening or closing of valves.

• Close on an analog setpoint, using deadband.

• Low-level Auto CLOSE Valve, remote OPEN/CLOSEfunction. Close when a “low level” switch opens.

• Automatic OPEN/CLOSE of Valve Remote OPEN/CLOSEfunction. Close when a “low level” switch opens.

• Valve Change-Over on Alarm with Reset.

PID controllers

The PID controller system is a set of software modules located inthe appropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. All combinations ofPID controllers are available. Cascade control is accomplished byconnecting two controllers together. The PID controllers can beconfigured from the Local or Remote Operator Station. Thefollowing parameters are available:


37AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Tuning parameters (gain, integration time and derivation time).

• Controller setpoint.

• Output mode (true control mode, AUTO, or valve positioncontrol mode, SEMIAUTO).

• Controller types (P, PI, PD or PID).

• Selection of input and output signal type.

• Input and output channel number.

• Sampling time.

Compressor control

The compressor control system is a set of software modules locatedin the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. The mainpurpose is to maintain the air receiver pressure at a constant value.This function includes remote manual and automatic start and stopof compressors, restart after blackout and automatic drain control.

The compressor control system communicates with the Local orRemote Operator Station and can be monitored or controlled fromhere.

Purifier control

The purifier control system is a set of software modules located inthe appropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. The purifier controlprogram is specially written to operate Alfa Laval‘s self cleaningoil purifiers, and includes operation of the following equipment:

• Crude oil booster pump (optional).

• Crude oil temperature controller.

• Purifiers.

• Sealing valves.

• Discharge valves.

The equipment may be controlled from the Remote or LocalOperator Station. Purifier configuration is selected manually byoperating different by-pass valves directly. The purifier controlprogram will sense if purifiers are running in series or parallel.Mode of operation is indicated in the mimic display by showing theoil path as green lines. Purifier no.1 will always run as purifier,whereas purifier no.2 may be selected to run as purifier or clarifier.

Boiler control

The boiler control system is a set of software modules located theappropriate Distributed Processing Unit’s. These The programconsists of a standard PID controller and is adaptable to differenttypes of boilers. The boiler control system uses fail checkingextensively, and employs a program for controlled shut down, andprovides visible alarms.


38 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Boiler system parameters are available on the Local or RemoteOperator Station. All parameters are found in the steam systemmimic display. System information such as alarms and analoguevalues are part of the normal DataChief C20 alarm andmonitoring system. The boiler control involves total control of thefollowing equipment:

• Fuel oil standby pumps.

• Burner motor.

• Fuel pre heater.

• Nozzles.

• Ignition unit.

• Air damper.

• Steam release valve.

These units are connected to and controlled by the appropriateDistributed Processing Unit.


39AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.5.4 Power management system

Introduction

The power management system controls the power generation anddistribution on board the vessel. It includes all the automaticfunctions necessary for safe and economic operation of the powerplant.

The basic system consists of one Distributed Processing Unit perconnected genearator unit. Each perform the power managementfunctions of the connected generator unit. The system is suitablefor electrical generators driven by a diesel engine, a steam turbineor by the propeller shaft. The Distributed Processing Units havedifferent configurations and control strategies depending on thetype of drive. The Distributed Processing Units are connected toRemote Operator Station (Remote Operator Station) which allowsthe operator to initiate the same monitoring and control functionsthat can be performed locally.

For complex Power management Systems an additionalDistributed Processing Unit, the dPSC, is used for mode controletc. This is a unit giving redundancy both in function andcommunication, and allows separation of local PMS CANprocessbus data traffic from other the global CAN-network of theDataChief C20 system.

The power management system will be adapted to the specificconfiguration of power generators and bus bars on the ship. Inorder to comply with the latest rules of separation of functions foralarm, control and safety, these functions have been addressed toseparate Distributed Processing Unit’s like this:

• Complex logic: A Dual Process Segment Gateway (whenneeded).

• PMS control logic: A Distributed Processing Unit RiO C1 foreach generator.

• Diesel generator Safety system: A separate DistributedProcessing Unit RiO C1.

• Bus-tie Control: A Distributed Processing Unit RiO C1 foreach Bustie.

• Alarms: To Rai-16 or Rdi-32 Units.

Note: These units interact on a dual redundant CAN-bus.


40 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Generator Control Functions

Synchronizing

The power management system automatically selects andsynchronizes generators to the net as required. A DistributedProcessing Unit controls speed, deviation of voltage/frequencyand breaker.

Frequency Control/Loadsharing

When automatic mode is selected, one of the DistributedProcessing Units must be defined as Master. The DistributedProcessing Unit designated as “ No.1 Stand-By “ willautomatically be master if no other master selection is made. Thebus bar frequency and voltage values from the main switchboardare available in all the Distributed Processing Units. The Mastermode Distributed Processing Unit is the reference for frequencyand voltage values. It maintains a constant bus frequency bycontrolling its engine’s speed. The Master mode DistributedProcessing Unit controls the bus frequency while the stand-byDistributed Processing Units controls the load-sharing.

Asymmetric Loadsharing

The Distributed Processing Unit has an asymmetric or unbalancedload-sharing function that will force one generator to run at almostmaximum load for a pre-defined period, while the secondgenerator is operating at minimal load and fuel consumption. Atthe expiration of the defined period, the generators swap loads.

Symmetric Loadsharing

If two or more generators are running and asymmetricload--sharing has not been requested, the load is shared equallybetween the generators.

Load-dependent Start/Stop of the Stand-by Generators

Each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will automaticallystart, synchronise and connect its generator according to itsassigned order-of-priority and whenever it receives one of thefollowing requests:

• Switch-on request from the heavy consumer(s) if the generatorsin operation cannot provide enough power.

• A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit whenits operating generator has developed a fault, which prevents itfrom maintaining its share of the load.

• A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit whenits operating generator is approaching the point of overload.


41AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

It is possible to override or block the low load auto-stop feature.Whenever blocked, the stand-by generator will keep on running,independent of the load parameters. This feature is especiallyuseful when a heavy consumer (e.g. a ship’s bow thruster) isrequired to be started instantaneously at irregular intervals.

Automatic Start-and-Connect After a Power Blackout.The powerblackout logic is triggered when the power management systemdetects that all breakers are disconnected and that the line voltageis low. (<10% of normal). In a power blackout situation, all of thegenerators controlled by each stand-by Distributed ProcessingUnit will start and connect to the bus.

Supervision of Heavy Consumer Switch-on

Each Distributed Processing Unit is able to supervise the switch-oncontrol heavy consumers to ensure that a switch-on will not causea power blackout. If the demand for power exceeds the capacity ofthe operating generators, the power management system will startup and connect a stand-by generator to ensure that sufficientcapacity is available before the request for switch-on is granted.

Power Management Functions with ShaftGeneratorMain Functions

One Distributed Processing Unit control the Shaft GeneratorDistributed Processing Unit, whereas other Distributed ProcessingUnits control the bus tie breaker and the other auxiliary generators.The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit logic is adaptableto various switch board configuration.

The following functions are available:

• Control of the shaft generator circuit breaker and the bus tiebreaker with automatic synchronisation.

• Control of the connection and disconnection of bow- and sternthruster.

• Overall control of the Distributed Processing Units that controlthe auxiliary generator sets.

Operational Modes/Mode Control

The power management system allows many different modes ofoperation. The following standard modes are provided, anexample with 1 SG, two DG’s, two busties and a bowthruster:

• Harbour: Both DG’s running. Both busties closed. This modeallows the bow thruster to be started. If load is low, andbowthruster not running the standby DG will automatically bedisconnected and stopped. This is blocked if the thruster isrunning or the STOP BLOCK switch in the Diesel GeneratorDistributed Processing Unit is activated.


42 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• At sea: The SG is running. Both busties closed. The bowthruster is blocked for starting. Both DG’s are stopped andstandby ready for start.

• Cargo handling: Bustie 2 is open. One or two DG’s powerconsumers on port busbar. The shaft generator is poweringheavy consumers on stand-by busbar. The bow thruster isblocked for starting.

• Manoeuvre: Bustie 1 is open. One or two DG’s powerconsumers on port busbar. The shaft generator power the bowthruster only.

Transition between these modes is possible in two ways:

• Mode control: Selection of one of the predefined operationalmode, leading to a set of actions which the operator has toperform in order to put the Power Generating System into thatmode.

• One-Touch Mode Control: Selection of one of the predefinedoperational mode, leading to a sequence of automatic events toput the Power Generating system into that mode. Thisone-touch control to be made from the Remote OperatorStation.

Always when changing mode from shaft generator powering thenet to auxiliary generators powering the net or to split netoperation, the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit willgive a start and connect command to at least two auxiliarygenerators. Upon reception of this command, the powermanagement system will only start one diesel at a time.

Shaft Generator OverloadThe Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will check foroverload of the shaft generator. If overloaded for more than apredefined period of time, a request for split net is generated.

Shaft- And Auxiliary Generator In ParallelThere is an adjustable time limit for parallel load sharing betweenshaft- and auxiliary generators. The bus-tie will automatically bedisconnected when parallel load sharing exceeds this time limit.

Shaft Generator Control FunctionsThe shaft generator is interfaced to the integrated control andalarm/monitoring system via the Shaft Generator DistributedProcessing Unit. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unithas facilities for remote start and stop. A speed drop functionversus load enable the shaft generator to be run in parallel withdiesel generators.

When the controller is set to remote operation mode, the followingfunctions are available:


43AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Manual start from keyboard and mimic diagrams

• Manual stop from keyboard and mimic diagrams

• Automatic stop in case of alarms on main engine or the shaftgenerator itself

• Monitoring of critical parameters when the shaft generator isrunning. (Additional function to controller, with its own safetyfunctions for the shaft generator)

When the shaft generator is connected, the master DistributedProcessing Unit will do loadsharing on the diesel generator inparallel with the shaft generator. The frequency on the busbar is aresult of the ME speed. Parallel load sharing between shaftgenerator and diesel generators are limited in time, controlled fromthe Power Management System.

The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit and theDistributed Processing Units perform the functions for the PowerManagement System completely independent of the Alarm- andMonitoring System.


44 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1.6 Technical specifications

1.6.1 IntroductionThe following is a summary of the technical specifications for theDataChief C20 Alarm and monitoring system with processcontrol and power management. Kongsberg Maritime ShipSystems is engaged in continues development of its products andreserves the right to alter specifications without prior notice.

1.6.2 Operator Control Panel (OCP)• Supply voltage: 24 V DC, ± 5% ripple (Input filter included)

• Power consumption: 4 W Nom (12 W when lamp testactivated).

• Ambient operational conditions: 0_C to + 70_C insideconsole.

• Maximum relative humidity: 97% non-condensing

• Ambient storage temperature: - 30_C to + 80_C

• Production burn-in: + 70_C for 72 hours

• Type approved by classification societies: DNV, LRS, BV,GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR, PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China).

• Cable connections:

- Power terminal: 2.5 mm2

- Signal terminal: 2.5 mm2

• Cable length to PC: 2,5 m.

• Weight of unit: 4 kg (cables and terminals 0.5 kg)

• Dimensions: W482.6 H265.8 D45 mm.

• Panel cut-out: W450 +1 H257 + 1 mm.

• Mounting: Flush mounting with screws or free standing incabinet.

• Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC): The OperatorControl Panel complies with the classification societyrequirements regarding electrostatic discharge, radiatedsusceptibility and conducted susceptibility. In addition it isprepared to meet the EU directive valid from 1.1.96 regardingradiated emission and conducted emission.

1.6.3 Midi Operator Station (MOS)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC ±5 % ripple.


45AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Power consumption: 10 W.

• Ambient operational temperature: -15_C to + 70_C

• Max. rel. Humidity: 96% non-condensing.

• Ambient storage temperature: 25°C to +70°C in a dry areawith approx. 70% humidity.

• Display: TFT colour, 5.7”, 320 x 240 pixels.

• Housing: Cast aluminium back, polycarbonate front.

• Weight of unit: 1.5 kg.

• Dimensions: W252 H144 B70 mm.

• Panel cut-out: 242 x 134 mm.

• Mounting: Bracket for table, ceiling and wall. Flush mountwith removable corners.

• Shock and vibration: DnV Class B, IACS E10 (Direct mounton engines, compressors, etc.).

• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, IEC 60945.

1.6.4 Local Operator Station (LOS)• Supply voltage: 18 – 32 V DC

• Power consumption: 6 W

• Ambient operational temperature: 0_C to + 70_C




• Dimension:

- Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm.

- Cut out: W211 x H138 mm.

• Mounting: Screws (4 Pcs M4)

1.6.5 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC







46 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Dimension:

- Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm.- Cut out: W211 x H138 mm.


1.6.6 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC






• Dimension:

- Outline: W240 x H144 x D50 mm.- Cut out: W211 x H138 mm.


1.6.7 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC

• Power consumption:

- Module Nominal 7,5W, Max. 10W- Current mode sensors add Nominal 9W, Max. 11

• Ambient operational temperature: - 15_C to + 70_C


• Max relative humidity: 96% non-condensing

• Mechanical environment:

- DnV Class B- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)

• EMC properties: According to IACS E10, EN60945


• Type Approval: DNV, LRS, BV, GL, RINA, NK, ABS, KR,PRS, MRS (Russia), CCS (China)

• Specification: ISO per module in power port: 50 VDCcontinues 50 VAC 1 minute.

• Isolation:

- Power Complete isolated: (DC/DC Converter)- I/O: No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0 Volt

reference.- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).


47AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Signal types:

- Input differential: CMV 10 [ V ]

- Voltage Scaling: ± 0,1/1/5/10 [Volt]

- Current Scaling: ± 1/5/10/20 [mA]

- Technical units: Free range

Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD):

- Scaling: PT100, PT1000 [Ω]

- Range: PT1000 0-200ºC, 0-600º PT100 0-200ºC,0-800ºC

• Accuracy: Voltage measurement A/D ±0.002 %

• Accuracy w/signal conditioning: ± 0.4 %

• Sensor excitation voltage and current: 30-40 mA nominal.Fused at 100mA per channel or 350 ma for the whole module,with overload indicator.

• BIST (Built In Self Test): Module temp, Power, Sensorexcitation overload.

1.6.8 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC

• Power consumption: Nominal 7,5W, Max. 10W





- DnV Class B

- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)




• Specification: Input: Differential CMV 10[V]. ISO per modulein power port: 50 VDC continues 50 VAC 1 minute.

• Isolation:

- Power Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)

- I/O No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0Volt reference.

- CAN Complete isolated (Opto coupler).


48 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Signal types:

- Thermocouples with Cold Junction compensation- According to IEC 584- Element: R/S/J/E/N 0-200, 0-600ºC- Element: B 0-600ºC- Element: T 0-200ºC- Element: K 0-200, 0-600, 0-1200ºC- Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD)- Scaling PT100, PT1000 [Ω]- Range PT1000 0-200ºC, 0-600º PT100 0-200ºC,

0-800ºC• Accuracy: Voltage measurement A/D ±0.002 %


1.6.9 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32 &RDi-32a)

• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC

• Power consumption: Nominal 8W





- DnV Class B- IACS E10 (Direct mount on engines, compressors etc.)





• Isolation:

RDi-32:

- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).- Input: Supplied from 24V DC Main power- Power: Isolated from Module chassis- RDi-32a:- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).- Input: Isolated between channels (Opto coupler)- Power: Isolated from Module chassis


49AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Signal types: On/off

• Specification:

- RDi-32: Dry contact

- RDi-32a: Active signal 24VDC or AC (50-70 Hz)

• Sensor excitation voltage and current: only for RDi-32 6 mA@ 24VDC nominal.


1.6.10 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC

• Power consumption: Nominal 8.5W, Max. 10W





- DnV Class B






• Isolation:

- Power: Complete isolated (DC/DC Converter)

- I/O: No isolation between channels. Chassis used as 0 Voltreference.

- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).

• Signal types:

- Voltage Scaling: ± 0,1/1/5/10[Volt]

- Current Scaling: ± 1/5/10/20 [mA]


• Accuracy: Voltage conversion D/A ±0.1 %


• Resolution: 12 bit


50 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Bandwidth: 10 [Hz]


1.6.11 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC






- DnV Class B





• Signal types: Digital Output

• Specification: All outputs max. 3 Amps 230V AC Relay:Resistive load 1 pole change over contact.

• Isolation:


- Output: Isolation between channels (relays)

- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler).


1.6.12 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC






- DnV Class B



51AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


• Weight of unit: 2 kg.


• Isolation: Ref.: Engineering Guide 656


• Digital output: – - All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay).Relay for resistive load 1 pole change over (NO/NC). Solid statefor inductive load (solenoid driver in parallel) 24V DC.

• Analogue output:

- Range: ±22mA

- Accuracy w/signal conditioning: ± 0.5 [%]

• Analogue input ACV (1-phase):

- Input: Max. 30Vrms

- Voltage Scaling: 30 [Volt]

- Frequency scaling: 0-90 [Hz]


- Accuracy w/ signal conditioning: ± 1 [%]

• Analogue input IAC:

- Input: Max 1A

- Current scaling: 0-1A


- Accuracy w/signal conditioning: ± 1 [%]

• Input from pickup:

- 24V DC (counter input): – - 5 KHz

• Analogue/digital input, flexible: – - For details, see separatedata sheet for RAi-16.

• Digital Input: – - For details, see separate data sheet forRDi-32.

• Derived calculated variables:

- KW active power

- KVAr reactive power

- COS ϕ

- Frequency



52 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003






- DnV Class B





• 2 ways isolation:

- I/O Communication.

- Power Communication.

• Digital output:

- All outputs max. 3 Amps 230VAC

- Relay: Resistive load 1 pole change over.

• Digital input:

- Dry contact, high side or low side switch

- Sensor excitation voltage and current: 6 mA @ 24VDCnominal.


• Isolation:

- CAN: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)

- Input: Isolation between channels (Opto coupler)

- Output: Isolation between channels (relays)

- Power: Isolated from module chassis







- Maximum 4g (allows direct mounting on engines,compressors, etc.)


53AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003





- I/O Communication.

- Power Communication.

- Power I/O

• Serial interfaces: 2 CAN ports for redundant communicationinterface (galvanic isolated).

• 4 Digital output:

- All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay).

- 1 pole change over. Inductive load.

• 3 phase ACV input:


- Voltage scaling: 29 Volt

- Frequency scaling: 0-90 Hz


- Accuracy: 1 %

• 3 phase IAC. Generator current (MSB):

- Input: Max 15A


- Over current scaling: 0-15A

- Maximum readable input: 15A.max 0.5 s

- Technical units: free range

- Accuracy: 1 %

- Over current: 5 %

• 3 phase IAC. generator current (internal):

- Input: Maximum 15A


- Maximum readable input: 5A

- Maximum input: 15A.max 0.5 s


- Accuracy: 1 %

• 3 Digital Input:

- Require dry contact or opto coupler.


54 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Trip display and reset switch: Local 7-segment display onmodule, reason for trip indication. Reset switch on module.








- Maximum 4g (allows direct mounting on engines,compressors, etc.)





- I/O Communication.- Power Communication.- Power I/O

• 8 Digital output:

- All outputs max. 3 Amps 250VAC (relay)- 1 pole change over. Inductive load.

• 2 ACV input (bus and generator):


- Voltage scaling: 29 Volt- Frequency scaling: 0-90 Hz- Technical units: Free range- Accuracy: 1 [%]

• 1 phase IAC. generator current input:

- Input: Max 15A- Current scaling: 0-5A

- Maximum readable input: 5A.- Maximum input: 15A.max 0.5 s- Technical units: Free range- Accuracy: 1 %


55AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• 4 Digital inputs:

- Require dry contact or opto coupler.

• 2 Analogue output:

- Range: 22mA and 11V

- Accuracy with signal conditioning: 1.0 %


1.6.16 Voltage Converter Controller(VCC)

• Supply voltage: 18 - 32 V DC






- Maximum 0.7g




• Isolation:

- Isolation between input terminal and ground: 2000VAC

- Isolation between input terminals: 2000VAC

• 2 ACV output synchronisation:

- 1 phase generator and 1 phase bus.

- Range: 0-24VAC

- Accuracy: 1.0 %

• 3 phase ACV output protection:

- 3 phase generator.

- Range: 0-24VAC

- Accuracy: 1.0 %

• 1 DC output (Protection backup power):

- Voltage: 24VDC

- Maximum current: 1000mA

- Accuracy: 5.0 %


56 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


1.6.17 Process Segment Starcoupler(PSS)

• Supply voltage: 18-32 VDC

• Power Consumption: Nominal 4 W Max. 5 W

• Ambient operational temperature: –15_C to +70 _C

• Ambient storage temperature: -25_C to +70_C



- DnV class B


• EMC properties: According IACS E10, EN60945

• Weight of module: 1 kg.


• Specification: Isolation power port: 50 VDC continuous 50VAC 1 minute.

• Isolation:



1.6.18 Dual Process Segment Controller(dPSC)

• Supply voltage: 18-32 VDC

• Power Consumption: Nominal 12 W Max. 15 W

• Ambient operational temperature: –15_C to +70 _C

• Ambient storage temperature: -25_C to +70_C



- DnV class B

- IACS E10 ( Direct mount on engines, compressors etc. )

• EMC properties: According IACS E10, EN60945

• Weight of module: 1.6 kg.



57AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Specification: Isolation power port: 50 VDC continuous 50VAC 1 minute.

• Isolation:



- Serial line: Complete isolated (Opto coupler)


58 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 GETTING STARTED

2.1 IntroductionThis chapter teaches you how to use the control functions anddisplays of the different DataChief C20 operator stations. It isintended for personnel just starting to use the system. Thefollowing subjects are covered:

- Using the Remote Operator Station

- Using the Midi Operator Station

- Using the Local Operator Station

- The Watch Calling System

- Using the Watch Bridge Unit

- Using the Watch Cabin Unit

Getting started

59AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2.2 Using the Remote Operator Station

2.2.1 Understanding the OperatorControl Panel

The Operator Control Panel often called OCP is a speciallydesigned keyboard that provides easy access to the operatorfunctions. It is divided into separate function areas. Push buttonsare combined with lamps to indicate alarms, status of theExtendedAlarm System and to indicate main system functions.

OverviewThefollowingillustrationshowsthelayoutof theOperatorControlPanel. The different buttons found on the panel can be divided intogroups and are explained in the following.

Red LEDs - alarm group buttonsGreen LEDs - watch function buttonsYellow LEDs - project dependent buttons

Power on LED

Keyboardconnector

Numerickeyboard

Standard function buttons

Trackballbuttons

Trackball.

Alarm functions & display buttons

Mimic buttons

Standard function buttons

Figure 14 Operator Control Panel (OCP) layout.

Numeric keyboard and trackball buttons

DELETE Used to delete numeric input (from right toleft) during an input sequence.(Backspace).

SPACE Used for passive settings for alarm limits etc.

ENTER Ends a sequence of numeric input or acti-vates editing.

PREVI-OUSPAGE

Displays the previous page in the selectedpage group.(Page Up)


60 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

NEXTPAGE

Displays the next page in the selected pagegroup.(Page Down)

ARROWBUTTON

Used to move the cursor or the high--lightedfield. There are four arrow keys; left, right, upand down.

READ Used for addressing an object (i.e. pump,valve) after placing the cursor over it by mov-ing the trackball.

DE--ACTIVATE/ STOP

Used for giving a STOP, CLOSE or DEACTI-VATE command to an object after addressingit using the READ button.

ACTIVATE/ START

Used for giving a START, OPEN or ACTIVATEcommand to an object after addressing itusing the READ button.

Alarm group buttonsLO, FO, FW, EX,CW, CA, DO, BW,MI, DS, BO, BR,OM, DG, SG, ES,FI, TS, ST, LS….

When a new alarm occurs, the correspondingalarm group lamp starts flashing, and thealarm buzzer is activated. To display informa-tion about the alarm, push the button. Newalarms are displayed in red colour, acknowl-edged alarms in yellow. The indicator stopsflashing when all alarms in the group havebeen acknowledged, but remains lit until allalarm conditions have returned to normal.

INHIBIT POINTS When this button is pushed, the colourgraphics display shows a list of inhibitsources.

SYSTEM FAILURE When a system failure occurs, the correspon-ding indicator starts flashing, and the alarmbuzzer is activated. To display informationabout the system failure, push the button. Theindicator stops flashing when the alarm hasbeen acknowledged, but remains lit until allalarm conditions have returned to normal.

Alarm function and display buttonsSOUND OFF When an alarm occurs the alarm buzzer and

engine room horn is activated. Push theSOUND OFF button to stop it.

ALARM SUMMARY Shows all active and unacknowledged alarmson the colour graphics display. Up to twenty-six alarms can be displayed simultaneously. Ifthere are more alarms, use the NEXT PAGEand PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to see themall.

Getting started

61AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

ALARM HISTORY Displays the last 2000 alarm events, with timeand date. Twentysix alarms are displayed oneach page. The last alarms are at the top ofthe list. To turn the pages, using the NEXTPAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons.

ALARMACKNOWLEDGE

This button is used to acknowledge alarms. Ifan Operator Control Panel group button hasbeen pushed, the alarm acknowledge buttonwill acknowledge all unacknowledged alarmson the colour graphics display. If more than 26new alarms have occurred, the next page willautomatically be displayed. If an OperatorControl Panel alarm group button has notbeen pushed, pushing the Alarm Acknowl-edge button will acknowledge the latest threealarms displayed in the lower right corner ofthe display.

Standard function buttonsCOUNTERSDISPLAY

Displays counters and lap counters informa-tion.

DEVIATIONPARAM. CONFIG.

Menu for input and display of parameters fordeviation calculation of exhaust gas tempera-tures.

GROUP / ALARM Toggles between all measuringpoints and thepoints in a group having an alarm status.

GROUP DISPLAY Displays all measuringpoints within an Oper-ator Control Panel alarm group.

SELECTEDBARGR. DISPLAY

Displays preselected measuringpoints as bar-graphs.

SELECTEDPOINTS DISPLAY

Displays preselected measuringpoints.

SELECTED TRENDDISPLAY

Display preselected measuringpoints as trendcurves.

SET DATE & TIME Used to adjust date & time.

SYSTEM INFODISPLAY

Displays system parameters and functions.

TAG DETAILS Menu used to display details for measuring--points and to change their parameters.

Logging buttonsAUTO LOGCONFIG

Menu used to enable and adjust the auto logprintout time.

MISC. LOGS Menu used to activate printout of logs and setup the printer.


62 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Tank and cargo functionsSHIPS DISPLAY Displays total volume for each tank content

type. Trim/list and draught display. Menu formanual trim/list specification and input andsea specific gravity input.

LEVEL CORR.DISPLAY

Display of raw level/ullage, corrections fortrim, list, sensor offset, specific gravity andcorrected level/ullage.

GENERAL TANKDISPLAY

Tank level [m], filling [%], volume [m3], spe-cific gravity [t/m3] and weight [t] display.

SEA HARBOURSELECT

Toggles between SEA and HARBOUR mode.This can be used to suppress tank alarmsduring the voyage.

CARGO TANKDISPLAY

Tank content type, ullage [m], actual tempera-ture [ºC], volume [m3], filling [%], volumecorrection factor, volume at 15 ºC [m3], weightair and US Barrels at 60 ºF.

CARGO APIDISPLAY

Tank content type, API, density at vac. 15ºC,density in air at 15ºC, density in air TºC, tem-perature (T) [ºC], density correction factor anddensity at actual temperature.

Mimic display buttonMIMIC DISPLAY Displays mimic window for process monitoring

and/or process control.

Control functions buttonsHIGH / LOW Toggles between high and low speed of

pumps and fans.

RESET Reset function for controllable objects such aspumps, fans, compressors and generators.

MASTER Master function for pumps, fans, compressorsand generators.

1.ST. STAND BY 1.st standby or stand by selection function forpumps, fans, compressors and generators.

NEXT STAND BY Stand by selection function for pumps, fans,compressors and generators.

AUTO / MAN Auto/manual (semi auto) mode selection forpumps, fans, compressors, controllers andgenerators.

Viewing conditions and testing buttonsMONITOR OCPDISPLAY

Menu to decreasing or increasing illuminationfor the Operator Control Panel (OCP) and co-lour graphics display on the Bridge.

ALARM TEST To test the alarm buzzers, alarm display, netcommunication and alarm printer push thebutton. To turn the test off push the buttonagain.

LAMP TEST To test all indicator lamps on the OperatorControl Panel push the button.

Getting started

63AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Watch indication and calling functions buttonsBRIDGE WATCH Initiates Bridge Watch (unattended engine

room). This means that the engine watch re-sponsibility is transferred to the bridge.

ENGINE WATCH Initiates Engine Watch. This means that theengine watch responsibility is in engine con-trol room mode.

CHIEF ENG. ONDUTY

When this indicator lamp is lit the Chief En-gineer is on duty, both in bridge-- and enginewatch. The ON DUTY indicator in the ChiefEngineers cabin and in the engineers day-rooms are lit.

CALL ALLENGINEERS

When this button is pushed, the indicatorlamp starts flashing, and the indicators andbuzzers in all WatchCall panels in the en-gineers quarters are activated. To deactivatethis function push the button again.

ENGINEERSON DUTY

When one or more of the 1st to 4th engineeron duty lamps are lit, the engineer on duty isin charge of the watch. The ON DUTY indica-tor in the engineers cabin and dayrooms arelit.

CALL DUTYENGINEER

When this button is pushed the indicator lampstarts flashing and the indicators and buzzeron the WatchCall panel in the duty engineersquarter is activated. To deactivate this func-tion push the button again.Note: This function is only available as analternative to a 4th Engineer button.

2.2.2 Systems without Operator ControlPanel

Some systems are delivered without Operator Control Panels.Thesesystemsareoperated through standardkeyboard andmouse.In these systems the Operator Control Panel is displayed on thecolour graphics monitor. Operation is similar for both types ofsystems.

1 Push the F1 function key to display the Operator ControlPanel.

2 Use the mouse to push the buttons and select the variousdisplay pages.

The following fuction keys are used:

- F1: Operator Control Panel (OCP) display

- F2: Alarm/group display

- F3: Sound off

- F4: Alarm acknowledge

- F5: Tag tetails


64 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 15 Typical Operator Control Panel displayed onmonitor.

2.2.3 Understanding the displayThe Remote Operator Station includes a standard colour graphicsdisplay. The operator interacts with the display through theOperator Control Panel or through keyboard and mouse.

Overview

The following illustration explains the layout of the RemoteOperator Station display.

• Aboutbutton:Push thebutton to display information about thesoftware version etc.

• Title window: Contains the title of the information currentlydisplayed in the main window.

Getting started

65AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Title window

Status window

Main window

Function window

Alarm window

Time window

About button

Figure 16 Main areas of the Remote Operator Station display.

• Status window: The status window is divided into twocolumns. These contains important status information for usersettings. The following abbreviations are used:

- Buz - OCP buzzer disabled.

- ACK - Acknowledge limitation override enabled.

- Mim - Mimic access override enabled.

• Time window: Shows current date and time.

→ Refer to page 107 for information on “How to change time zone”.

• Main window: Contains the main display information such asalarmlists,bargraphs, trenddisplays,configurationdata,mimicdiagrams etc.

• Function window: Displays information related to user input.

• Alarm window: Displays the last four alarms independent ofthe information displayed in the main window.


66 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2.3 Using the Midi Operator Station

2.3.1 Overview

The Midi Operator Station, often called MOS is a speciallydesigned operator panel that provides easy access to operatorfunctions. It is used as a local operator station in larger systems oras the main operator station for more limited systems.

The display examples shown in this manual are not always an exactcopy of what you will see on the screen, as the presentationdepends on your system configuration and choices of set-up.

2.3.2 Understanding the keyboard

Some of the key functions are general and can be applied at anytime, other key functions are related to certain menu(s) and canonly be applied when in the appropriate menu.

Escape

Function keysF1 to F4

Page down

Page up

Sound off

Acknowledge

Clear

Figure 17 Keyboard layout.

Escape. Removes menus. Goes back to the previous picture in upto five steps by pushing repeatedly.

Turns menus on. The displayed menu will vary with theoperational context.

Go to submenu or display. Confirms insertion and editing of data.Gives access to set-up displays.

ESC

MENU

ENTER

Getting started

67AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Page up. Moved the displayed information up a page in the selectedgroup.

Page down. Moved the displayed information down a page in theselected group.

Sound off. Push to turn audible alarms off.

Alarm acknowledge.

Four-way navigator key. Moves a square cursor up/down to selecttext in data displays. Moves a square cursor left/right/up/down andto select objects in mimic pictures.

Function keys. The function is specified by the text next to the key(left side). Function keys have a one minute time-out to avoidaccidental input. Push the Page up or Page down keys to active thefunctions keys again.

Alpha-numeric keys for insertion of letters and numbers. Push thebutton repeatedly until the desired letter or number is displayed.

Key to insert the following special characters (. - _). Push thebutton repeatedly until the desired character is displayed.

Clear. Deletes data in enter or edit mode.

2.3.3 Understanding the displayThe midi operator station includes a bright colour flat paneldisplay. The operator interacts with the display through thekeyboard.

• Window title: Contains the title of the information currentlydisplayed in the main window.

• Menu window: Displays the various menus available.

• Scroll bar: Indicates how much of the total information in thiswindow is displayed (similar to scroll bars used in standardWindows applications).

• Alarm window: Displays the last alarm independent of theinformation displayed in the main window.

ACK

F1 - F4

0 - 9

.-_

CLR


68 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm window

Scroll bar

Window title

Menu window

Figure 18 Display layout example.

Indicates thatadditionalfunctionbuttons areavailable. Usethe Page upand PageDown buttonsto displaythem.

Alarm window

Window title

Figure 19 Display layout example including graphics.

Getting started

69AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm window

Indicates thatadditionalinformation isavailable. Usethe navigatorkey to displayit.

Scroll bar

Figure 20 Display layout example.

2.3.4 Menu overview

The following menus are available:

Main Menu

1 Alarm Menu

2 DPU Overview

3 Tag Selection Menu

4 Configuration Menu

5 Help

Alarm Menu

1 Alarm History

2 Alarm Summary

3 Alarm Group Display

Tag Menu

1 Tag Details

2 Mimic

3 Alarm Status

4 Main Menu


70 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Tag Selection Menu

1 Control Menu

2 PMS Menu

3 MMI Tags

4 All Tags

Control Menu

1 Pumps

2 Valves

3 Controllers

4 Standby Sets

PMS Menu

1 Power Manager

2 Switch boards

3 Generators

4 Aux Breakers

5 Sync Breakers

Configuration

1 User Access

2 Keyboard/Screen

3 Advanced

4 Printer

5 Self check

Getting started

71AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2.4 Using the Local Operator Station

2.4.1 Understanding the Local OperatorStation

Overview

The Local Operator Station is used for local access to theDistributed Processing Units for inspection of process variables,local operation of equipment, adjustment of parameters andinspection of the built-in diagnostics.

DPU002

LOS

DPU003

DPU004

DPU001

CAN A

CAN B

dPSC

dPSC

Figure 21 Local Operator Station on CAN bus segment.

The Local Operator Station (LOS) can connect to all DistributedProcessing Units (DPU) connected to the same CAN-bus. Fromthe local operator station you select a Distributed Processing Unit.As soon as connection is established, the Local Operator Stationis able to control it.

On lineindicator

Pushbuttons

Alarm indicators

- Display Line # 1 : Menu Name Line -----------

- Display Line # 2 : Top Menu Item /Selection Line

- Display Line # 3 :

- Display Line # 4 : Prompt Texts for F1,F2,F3,F4

Display

Alarm indicator 6

Figure 22 Local Operator Station layout

The functions available are defined by the functionality of eachindividual type of Distributed Processing Unit. Pushbuttons arecombined with lamps to indicate alarms, status of the extendedalarm system and to indicate main system functions. The Localoperator Station has the following main functions:


72 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

IndicatorsOn Line Indicates that the Local Operator Station is

connected to an active Distributed ProcessingUnit.

Alarm 1 -- 5 These alarm indicators are active in an alarmsystem application. Labels are ship depend-ent.

Alarm 6 -- Unit Fail Indicates that the Local Operator Station isunable to get in touch with a Distributed Pro-cessing Unit.

Other LED indica-tors

Many of the buttons have LED indicators.These indicators have different meanings de-pendent on the menu being operated.

DisplayLine 1 Displays module name, menu name, tag

name etc. The display text depends on themenu selected.

Line 2 Displays the menu item that will be selected ifthe Menu Down button is pressed

Line 3 Application dependent information

Line 4 Application dependent information

Push buttons

oMENUUP

Used to return to the menu level above thecurrent menu.

iMENUDOWN

Used to select a more detailed menu for theitem currently displayed in the second displayline.

uSELECTUP

Used to scroll the three bottom lines on thedisplay to select a new menu, a tag or a para-meter. Display lines are scrolled down.

dSELECTDOWN

Used to scroll the three bottom lines for selec-tion of a new menu, a tag or a parameter Dis-play lines are scrolled up.

+ADJUSTUP

Used to adjust the value of the selected para-meter (displayed in the second line). Thevalue is increased.

-ADJUSTDOWN

Used to adjust the value of the selected para-meter (displayed in the second line). Thevalue is decreased.

rDEFAULT Used to jump to the first item in the selected

menu.

eENTER Used to confirm value adjustment and store

adjusted value.

p

n

ARROWBUTTONS

Navigation and adjustment buttons. Used toswitch between overview 1 and 2. Used toforce maximum adjustment speed, and to se-lect next and previous tags when Tag Detailsare displayed.

Getting started

73AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1F1--F4 Function buttons, the function depends on the

selected menu.

aACK Used to acknowledge alarms.

sSOUNDOFF

Used to turn the alarm sound off.

tTEST Used to verify that lamps and buzzer are

functioning. Also used by the Local OperatorStation menu for other tests.

LOS top menu

DPU 001/01.00.20 _RAi16_

DPU 002/01.00.21 _RDi16_

DPU 003/01.00.22 _RAi16_

RAi16 Top Menu

Alarm History

Alarm Summary

Tag Overview Menu

RAi16 Tag Overview

1

2

3

48

Tag Details An.Input

Parameter Explanation

DPU 004/01.00.23 _RAi16_

ALARM DETAILS

ALARM DETAILS

Figure 23 Typical Local Operator Station menu structure.

2.4.2 Menu structureThe Local Operator Station menu structure is a tree structure,similar to that found in many Microsoft Windows programs.


74 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1 Use the MENU UP and MENU DOWN buttons to gobetween different menu levels.

2 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons toscroll up and down each menu.

2.4.3 How to access menusThe Local Operator Station can only be connected to oneDistributed Process Unit at a time. Selecting the DistributedProcess Unit is done from the Local Operator Stations Top Menu.Do the following:

- At power on the LOS top menu will automatically bedisplayed.

1 If the top menu is not displayed, repeatedly push the MENUUP button until the LOS top menu is displayed.

- Depending on the application, the display may looksomething like this:

LOS top menu;Select dpu:>DPU 001/01.00.20 _RAi16_ DPU 002/01.00.21 _RDi16_ DPU 003/01.00.22 _RAi16_

Figure 24 Local Operator Station top menu

- The LOS top menu presents a list of available DistributedProcessing Units (DPU) on the CAN bus.

2 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons toscroll the list of Distributed Process Units.

3 To view data for a Distributed Processing Unit move itsname to the second line in the display.

4 Push the MENU DOWN button to activate the top menu forthat Distributed Processing Unit.

- The online indicator is lit.

Getting started

75AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2.4.4 How to move between menu levels

1 Moving from one menu level to another, is done by pushingthe MENU UP or MENU DOWN buttons:

2.4.5 How to move inside a menuAfter selecting a Distributed Processing Unit (see “How to accessmenus” above) the top menu for that unit is displayed. Dependingon the unit type, the display may look something like this:

- RAi16 top menu --- DPU 001/01.00.20>Tag Overview Menu Alarm History |Discon|

Figure 25 Distributed Processing Unit top menu.

1 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons toscroll the list of menu items for that Distributed ProcessingUnit.

2 When the desired menu item is displayed on the second line,push the MENU DOWN button. This activates that menuitem.

3 To leave this menu item and return to the LOS top menu,push the F1 button.


76 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2.5 The watch calling system

2.5.1 OverviewThe watch calling system is designed to allow periodicallyunmanned engine-room. It consists of:

• Watch Bridge Units (WBU).

• Watch Cabin Units (WCU).

• Remote Operator Station.

The Watch Bridge Units are used for• Indicate Watch Responsible area.

• Indicate who is On Duty.

• Indicate the current alarm status.

• Sounds a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs andsomeone is On Duty.

• Allows you to contact (call) duty personnel.

The Watch Cabin Units are used for• Indicates who is On Duty.

• Indicates the current alarm status.

• Indicates when you are being called and who is calling.

• Sounds a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs.

Figure 26 Basic Watch Calling System components.

2.5.2 How does the Watch Calling repeatalarm feature work

The repeat alarm feature of the Watch Calling System monitors allresponses to an alarm condition to ensure that the alarm isacknowledged. The repeat alarm feature distributes the alarmsusing three sequences to ensure that the alarm will not gounacknowledged:

Getting started

77AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

The first-time/original alarm is relayed to:

- The area designated as Watch Responsible.

- The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units.

- The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas.

The second-time/1st repeat alarm:

After a set period of time, if the alarm remains unacknowledged,it is repeated and relayed to:


- The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units.


The third-time/2nd repeat alarm:

After a set period of time, if the alarm is still not acknowledged,it is repeated and relayed to:


- The Watch Cabin Units for ALL QUALIFIED engineers.



78 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2.6 Using the Watch Bridge Unit

2.6.1 Explanation of controls andindicators

Two different types of Watch Bridge Units are available:

• The LCD-type has a 4 row by 40 characters display and sevenalarm groups.

• The LED-type has nineteen alarm groups.

The following illustrations describes the main functionality of thetwo types.

LAMP TESTPush to check

that all indi-cators are OK.

SYSTEM FAILIndicates thatthe unit hasfailed.

Indicates theofficer having

on-duty status.

Indicate if theengineers safetysystem is active.

Used to call onduty officers.

Indicates the locationhaving watch

responsability.

Used to scrollalarms on thedisplay

These alarmsare divided intogroups forhandling anddefining priority.

Used to SELECT alarm summary, selectedpoints summary or time display.

Used to displayTAG DETAILS.

SOUND OFFPush to silencethe buzzer.

Figure 27 Watch Bridge Unit, LCD type.



on-duty status.

Indicate if theengineers safetysystem is active.

Indicates the locationhaving watch

responsability.

Used to increaseor descreasetext illumination.




Used to call onduty officers.


Figure 28 Watch Bridge Unit, LED type.

Getting started

79AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

The main difference between the two types are that the LCD typecan display individual alarm messages, while the LED type has alarger number of alarm groups.

- The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type will display date andtime when no-one is ON DUTY.

- For the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type all indicators willbe dark when no-one is ON DUTY.

- The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is notacknowledged within a set period of time.

2.6.2 How to adjust illumination for LEDtype panels

1 Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.

2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and then use the arrowbuttons.

2.6.3 How to adjust illumination for LCDtype panels

1 Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST then SELECTand use the arrow buttons.

2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrowbuttons.

2.6.4 How to test the panel1 Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and

the buzzer sounds.

- If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace thepanel. There are no field serviceable parts inside.


80 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2.7 Using the Watch Cabin Unit

2.7.1 Explanation of controls andindicators

Two different types of Watch Cabin Units are available:

• The LCD-type has a 4 row by 40 characters display and sixalarm groups.

• The LED-type has seventeen alarm groups.

The following illustrations describes the main functionality of thetwo types.


on-duty status.

Indicates that youhave been called.

Used to scrollalarms on thedisplay




Used to displayTAG DETAILS.

Used to SELECT alarm summary, selectedpoints summary or time display.



Figure 29 Watch Cabin Unit, LCD type.




on-duty status.

Indicates that youhave been called.

Used to increaseor descreasetext illumination.




Figure 30 Watch Cabin Unit, LED type.

Getting started

81AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

The main difference between the two types are that the LCD typecan display individual alarm messages, while the LED type has alarger number of alarm groups.

- The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type will display date andtime when no-one is ON DUTY.

- For the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type all indicators willbe dark when no-one is ON DUTY.

- The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is notacknowledged within a defined period of time.

2.7.2 How to respond to alarmsWhen an alarm condition occur the buzzer will sound and the alarmis indicated on the Watch Cabin Unit. Do the following:

1 Push SOUND OFF.

2 Read the alarm information on the display or the text next tothe indicator.

3 Take appropriate action.

4 Check that the alarm is no longer displayed when the alarmsituation no longer exist.

2.7.3 How to adjust illumination for LEDtype panels

1 Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.

2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and then use the arrowbuttons.

2.7.4 How to adjust illumination for LCDtype panels

1 Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST then SELECTand use the arrow buttons.

2 Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrowbuttons.

2.7.5 How to test the panel1 Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and

the buzzer sounds.

- If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace thepanel. There are no field serviceable parts inside.


82 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM

3.1 IntroductionThis chapter contains a detail descriptions of how to operate theDataChief C20 alarm and monitoring system from the differenttypes of operator stations. It is intended for users already familiarwith the “Getting Started” section of this manual.


- Remote Operator Station

- Midi Operator Station

- Watch Bridge Unit

- Watch Cabin Unit

- ShipViewer

Figure 31 DataChief C20 Operation.

Alarm and monitoring system

83AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.2 Remote Operator Station

3.2.1 How to handle alarm events

When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the followingtakes place:

- The alarm text with time, date and identification is printed.

- The alarm group indicator on the Operator Control Panelstarts flashing.

- The buzzer in the Operator Control Panel is activated.

- The alarm is indicated in red in the lower right corner of thecolour graphics display.

- External alarm devices such as engine room horn areactivated.

Do the following:

1 Push the SOUND OFF button.

- This turns off the external alarm devices and the buzzer.

2 Push the flashing alarm group button.

- This display(s) the alarms on the colour graphics display inred.

3 Push the ALARM ACK. button.

- This changes the alarm text from red to yellow.

4 Attend to the alarm situation.

Note The last four unacknowledged alarms are always displayed on thelower right side of the colour graphics display and may beacknowledged without selecting group display.

3.2.2 How alarms are printed after ablack-out

Loss of ships power

The Distributed Processing Units (24 Volt DC) and the Remoteoperator stations (230 Volt AC) are supported by separateuninterruptible power supplies. The system will maintain powerfor 30 minutes after a blackout. Each Distributed Processing Unittimestamps its own alarms immediately when they occur. Thistimestamping is very accurate. All alarms are sorted and printedout according to the time they were detected.

SOUNDOFF

ALARMACK


84 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Loss of power to Remote Operator StationsThe Distributed Processing Units store all the alarm information.If the Remote Operator Stations loose power the the system willcontinue to operate, and can be monitored or controlled from theLocal Operator Stations. When power is restored to the RemoteOperator Stations all alarms are sorted and printed out accordingto the time they were detected.

Loss of power to Distributed Processing units

If you loose power to the Distributed Processing Units the systemwill not be working for the duration of the power interruption. Allsettings are how ever retained and as soon as power is restored thesystem will be up and running.

3.2.3 How to display alarm summaryThis function will display all active alarms. Do the following:

1 Push the ALARM SUMMARY button.

- A summary of all active and unacknowledged alarms aredisplayed on the colour graphics display.

2 Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to gobackwards and forwards in the list when more than one pageexists.

3.2.4 How to display alarm historyThis function displays a chronological list of alarm events. Do thefollowing:

1 Push the ALARM HISTORY button.

- A complete chronological list of all alarm events aredisplayed on the colour graphics display. The newest alarmsare displayed on top.* Unacknowledged alarms are displayed in red.* Acknowledged alarms are displayed in yellow.* Cleared alarm conditions are displayed in green.


3.2.5 How to display alarm groupinformation

This function is used to view the tags in an alarm group. The valueand alarm limits for each tag is displayed. Do the following:

ALARMSUMMARY

ALARMHISTORY


85AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1 Push the GROUP DISPLAY button.

- The prompt Select group: is displayed in the lower left ofthe colour graphics display.

2 Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or pushthe desired alarm group button on the Operator ControlPanel.

- The group name is displayed with the tag highlighted at thetop.


3.2.6 How to display counters and resetcounters

This function is used to view running hours for pumps, mainengine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc. The totalaccumulated value and “lap” value for each tag is displayed. Do thefollowing:

- Requires that “Reset Counters” is enabled→ See “How to enable resetting of counters” on page 96.

1 Push the COUNTER DISPLAY button.

- The system counters are displayed.

2 A counter value may be changed by using the UP/DOWNarrow keys to highlight it.

3 Push ENTER to address it.

- The prompt Enter new Counter value: is displayed in thelower left of the colour graphics display.

4 Type in the new counter value.

5 Push ENTER.

- It is possible to reset all counters selecting Reset allcounters or Reset all lap counters.

→ See “How to display system information” on page 92.

3.2.7 How to display offscan alarmsThis function is used to view tags set to offscan. The value andalarm limit for each tag are displayed. Do the following:

GROUPDISPLAY

COUNTERDISPLAY


86 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003



2 Type in -2 (minus 2).

3 Push ENTER.

- Offscan tags are displayed.

4 Use the PREVIOUS PAGE and NEXT PAGE buttons to gobackwards and forwards in the list when more than one pageexists.

3.2.8 How to toggle between group andalarm display

Do the following:



2 Type in a group number, or push the desired group button onthe Operator Control Panel.

3 Push ENTER

- The group name is displayed with the tag highlighted at thetop.

4 Push the GROUP/ALARM button.

- For each push of the button the display toggles between alltags and tags in alarm state.

3.2.9 How to acknowledge alarmsSeparate and group alarms can be acknowledged while a mimic-,an alarm group- or an alarm summary display is active. There arethree ways to acknowledge alarms:

Method 1

To acknowledge up to tree of the active alarms displayed in thelower right corner of colour graphics display do the following:

GROUPDISPLAY

-

2

GROUPDISPLAY

GROUPDISPLAY


87AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


- A maximum of three alarms are acknowledged at the sametime. Any unacknowledged alarms will replace those justacknowledged.

Method 2

Do the following:

1 Push the ALARM HISTORY button.

- The alarm history is displayed.


- A maximum of three alarms are acknowledged at the sametime. The alarm text turns yellow. When the alarm conditionreturns to normal, the text turns green.

Method 3

Do the following:

1 Push the ALARM GROUP button.


- All active alarms shown on the colour graphics monitor areacknowledged. If there are more unacknowledged alarmspush PAGE DOWN to acknowledge the additional alarms.The alarm texts changes from red to yellow. When all alarmshave been acknowledged the alarm button is steady lit. Whenall alarm conditions in the selected alarm group havereturned to normal, the colour graphics display is cleared.

3.2.10 How to set day, dusk or nightviewing conditions

When the Remote Operator Station is placed on the bridge or in asimilar places it is useful to set the viewing conditions for day, duskor night viewing. You can also turn the screen saver on/off andadjusting the time delay before the screen saver is turned on.

Monitor Dimmer Function

1 Push the MONITOR OCP DISPLAY button.

ALARMACK

ALARMHISTORY

ALARMACK

ALARMGROUP

ALARMACK

MONITOROCP

DISPLAY


88 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons or the trackball to selectDay, Dusk/Dawn or Night.

3 Push ENTER.

4 Push 1.

5 Push ENTER.

- The selected viewing condition is set.

OCP Dimmer Function

6 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons or the trackball to selectthe lamp intensity you wish to change.

7 Push ENTER.

8 Type in a number between 1 and 7.

9 Push ENTER.

- 7 will give the brightest light.

Screen Saver

10 Use the arrow buttons or the trackball to select Screen SaverDelay.

11 Push ENTER.

- The text Enter new delay in minutes (0 to turn saver off):is displayed on the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.

12 Type in the delay time.

13 Push ENTER.

- Maximum delay time is 60 minutes.

Note The screen saver is automatically turned of if any of the inputdevices are activated or a new alarm occurs.

3.2.11 How to print a Complete logA remote operator station can only be connected to one printer.This printer will have a defined function:

• Alarm printer

1

1-7


89AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Log printer

If there is only one printer in the system, the printer will serve bothfunctions. Do the following to activate printouts:

1 Push the MISC. LOGS button.

2 Select Complete log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Complete log (1=start, 0=abort) is displayedin the lower left of the display.

4 Push 1 to select printout.

5 Push ENTER.

- The printer starts printing the log.

- Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY.

- When the printout is completed, status indication for all logswill go back to READY.

M/S EAGLE NORCONTROLAUTOMATIONA/S DC2000KALDNES HULL NO: 10COMPLETE LOG 93--12--27 12:16:45 PAGE 1

Tagname Tag description Func Value Eng.unit Alarm Low Lim. High lim.

AE001 STARTINGAIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )AE002 CHARGEAIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )FO001 F.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )FO001 F.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )LO001 L.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )LO001 L.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME001 STARTINGAIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME002 CYL.1 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME003 CYL.2 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME004 CYL.3 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME005 CYL.4 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )

Figure 32 Typical example of Complete log.

3.2.12 How to print an Alarm Summerylog

- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Alarm Summary.

MISC.LOGS

1

ALARMSUMMARY


90 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.2.13 How to print a Level Correction log

- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Level Correction.

3.2.14 How to print a Tank log

- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Tank log.

3.2.15 How to print a Counters log

- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Counters log.

3.2.16 How to print an Inhibit log

- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Inhibit log.

3.2.17 How to print an Offscan log

- Use the procedure for Complete Log above, but use theUP/DOWN arrow buttons to select Offscan log.

3.2.18 How to print Group logDo the following to activate printouts:


2 Select Group log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Select group log: is displayed in the lower leftof the display.

4 Type in the group number.

5 Push ENTER

6 Or push one of the alarm group buttons.

7 Push ENTER.

- The printer will start printing the log.- Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY.- When the printout is completed, status indication for all logs

will go back to READY.

LEVELCORRECTION

TANKLOG

COUNTERLOG

INHIBITLOG

OFFSCANLOG

MISC.LOGS


91AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.2.19 How to print a Selected points logA Selected points log can only be printed from the RemoteOperator Station fitted configured to do that.

Note Printing a Selected Points log on demand, will clear the intervalset for printing of Selected points log.

→ See “How to set interval for Selected points log” on page 111.


2 Select Sel. Points Log using the UP/DOWN arrow buttons.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Selectlog number: is displayed in the lower leftof the display.

- The note “Selected Log Interval will be deleted” isdisplayed.

4 Type in the number (between 1 and 5) of the selected pointslog you wish to print.

5 Push ENTER .

- The printer starts printing the log.

- Status indication for all other logs will change to BUSY.

- When the printout is completed, status indication for all logswill go back to READY.

3.2.20 How to stop a printout


2 Select the log you want to stop using the UP/DOWN arrowbuttons.

3 Push ENTER.

4 Push 0 to stop the printout.

- The printing stops when the printer buffer is empty.

Printer responsible parameters

- These parameters indicates which Remote Operator Stationis responsible for printing alarms and logs.

MISC.LOGS

MISC.LOGS

0


92 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Printer set-up parameters

- A list of current printer settings, such as printer type andform feed length. The later is useful when ordering printerpaper. These parameters are normally set duringcommissioning.

3.2.21 How to display system information

This function is used to display various system information suchas ship and station information, software version, functions,limited access override etc. and allows further access to displayingand controlling system parameters. Do the following:

1 Push the SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY button.

- The system information display is shown on the colourgraphics display.

3.2.22 About password access

An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledgealarms and change system parameters or information. The statusof this system is available by pushing System InformationDisplay.

Figure 33 System Information Display.

SYSTEMINFO

DISPLAY

SYSTEMINFO

DISPLAY


93AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

The access control system is based on the use of passwords. Thefollowing password levels are available:

- Acknowledge: Allows acknowledging of alarms. Used toreceive and acknowledge alarms from Remote OperatorStations that normally wouldn’t receive them, such as on thebridge. When typing in the password you can also set theexpiration time.The password expiration time can be set toany number of minutes. When set to 0 the password will notautomatically expire. Push the Release Access button in TagDetails or change the status to NO in the SystemConfiguration Display.

- Mimic: Allows system control through the mimic pictures.Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) componentsyou normally don’t have access to, such as for instanceoperating the power management from the cargo controlroom. The password expiration time can be set to anynumber of minutes. When set to 0 the password will notautomatically expire. Push the Release Access button in TagDetails or change the status to NO in the SystemConfiguration Display.


94 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 34 Password window.

- Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarmdelays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups,enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for eachRemote Operator Station. Access automatically expire after30 minutes or when pushing the Release Access button inTag Details.

- Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays,event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Accessautomatically expire after 30 minutes or when pushing theRelease Access button in Tag Details.

- Password: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delaysand event limits. This password does not automaticallyexpire. Push the Release Access button in Tag Details orchange the status to NO in the System ConfigurationDisplay.

- Yes: In the System Configuration Display indicates thataccess at this level is available.

- No: In the System Configuration Display indicates thataccess at this level is not available.

Note Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allowsunauthorized access to vital system functions.

If you try to make changes without having inserted the rightpassword the system will automatically request it.

3.2.23 How to display DistributedProcessing Unit information

This procedure allows display of all parameters for each tag suchas values , alarm status, alarm limits etc. Do the following:



SYSTEMINFO

DISPLAY


95AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Unitdisplay.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter unit number: is displayed on the lowerleft side of the colour graphics display.

4 Type in the number of the DPU.

5 Push ENTER.

- The information about the selected processing unit isdisplayed.

6 Use NEXT PAGE or PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to selectthe next or previous Distributed Processing Unit.

3.2.24 Info field enable- This parameter is for Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems use

only.

3.2.25 How to enable changing of Eng.unit/counts



2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Eng.unit change.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Eng.unit counts/change enable (1=on, 0=off):is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.

4 Type 1.

5 Push ENTER to enable changing of Eng.unit/counts.

→ Refer to page 117 for information on “How to change tagparameters for an analogue channel” and page 120 forinformation on “How to change tag parameters for a digitalchannel”.

SYSTEMINFO

DISPLAY

1


96 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.2.26 How to enable resetting ofcounters

This function is used to reset counters for running hours for pumps,main engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc.



2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after Resetcounters.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Reset all counter enable (1=on, 0=off): isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.

4 Type 1 .

5 Push ENTER to enable resetting of all counters in theCOUNTERS DISPLAY.

→ Refer to “How to display and reset counters” on page 85 formore information.

3.2.27 How to override limitations toacknowledge alarms

This function allows acknowledging of alarms from RemoteOperator Stations which would not normally allow it.



2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text afterAcknowledge.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter acknowledge limit. override password:is displayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.

4 Type in the password.

5 Push ENTER.

- The text Acknowledge limitation override enabled isdisplayed in the function window.

- You may now acknowledge alarms from this RemoteOperator Station.

SYSTEMINFO

DISPLAY

1

SYSTEMINFO

DISPLAY


97AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Note The text ACCESS OVERRIDE ACK will be displayed in the statusarea until the override is reset, refer page 65.

3.2.28 How to override limitations tocontrol pumps and valves

This function allowscontrolling of pumps and valves from RemoteOperator Stations which would not normally allow it.



2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text afterMimic.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter mimic limit. override password: isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.


5 Push ENTER.

- The text Mimic access override enabled is displayed.

- You may now control pumps and valves from this RemoteOperator Station.

Note The text ACCESS OVERRIDE MIM will be displayed in thestatus area until the override is reset, refer page 65.

3.2.29 How to silence the OperatorControl Panel buzzer



2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text after OCPBuzzer silent.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter OCP Buzzer disable password: isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.


SYSTEMINFO

DISPLAY

SYSTEMINFO

DISPLAY


98 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

5 Push ENTER.

- The Operator Control Panel (OCP) buzzer is now disabled.

Note The text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will be displayed in the statusarea until the disabling is turned off, refer page 65.

3.2.30 How to set tags to offscan→ Refer to page 117 How to change parameters for an analogue

channel or page 120 for How to change parameters for a digitalchannel.

3.2.31 How to change alarm limits→ Refer to page 117 How to change parameters for an analogue


3.2.32 How to change alarm delay→ Refer to page 117 How to change parameters for an analogue


3.2.33 How to access the Watch Callingconfiguration

This function allows configuration of the Watch Calling System.



2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text afterConfiguration Menu.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter 1 to Configure Watch Call: is displayedat the lower left side of the colour graphics display.

4 Type 1.

5 Push ENTER.

- The Watch Calling configuration pages are displayed.

SYSTEMINFO

DISPLAY

1


99AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6 Use the use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGEbuttons to go between the pages.

3.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineerThe engineer to be assigned to On Duty must have qualificationsthat comply with the on duty assignment. The system verifies eachduty assignment by checking the engineer qualifications table. Amessage will appear on the screen if the engineer is not qualifiedfor the assigned duty. The following example shows the procedurefor selecting an engineer:

Officer On DutyOfficer Qual.Duty

f Chief Engineer E Nf 1st Engineer E Ef 2nd Engineer E Nf 3rd Engineer N Nf Chief Cargo M Nf 1st Cargo C C

Figure 35 On Duty engineer including qualifications.

Explanation to the abbreviations:

* E - Engine duty

* C - Cargo duty

* M - Multipurpose duty

* N - No qualifications

- This procedure requires that the system is in “engine controlroom watch”.

1 Use the procedure as described in “How to access the WatchCalling configuration“ on page 98.

2 Use the NEXT PAGE and PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to gobetween the pages.

3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select theOn Duty engineer.

4 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Officer on Engine duty (1=Engine duty): isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.


100 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

5 Type 1.

6 Push ENTER.

- The engineer On Duty has been set - the indicator turnsgreen.

3.2.35 How to select the WatchResponsible location

Note This procedure requires that an engineer is set to on duty. Refer to“How to set the On Duty engineer“ above.

The engine control room is the default Watch Responsiblelocation. Use the following procedure to select an alternativeWatch Responsible location. This can be done in the followingthree ways:

On the Operator Control Panel

1 Push the button for the watch responsible location you want(BRIDGE WATCH, ENG WATCH).

- The indicator for the new location will flash until acceptedat that location, for example the Watch Bridge Unit panel onthe bridge.

- The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibilityhas been accepted. The indicator for the previous location isswitched off - not lit.

On the Watch Bridge Unit

1 Push the button for the watch responsible location you want(BRIDGE WATCH, ENG WATCH buttons).

- The indicator for the new location will flash until acceptedat that location, for example the Remote Operator Station inthe engine control room.


On the Remote operator station display



1


101AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select theWatch Responsibility Area.

Responsibilityf Bridge WatchF Engine CR Watch

Figure 36 Watch responsibility location before change.

4 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Activate operation (1=active): is displayed atthe lower left side of the colour graphics display.

5 Type 1.

6 Push ENTER.

ResponsibilityF Bridge Watchf Engine CR Watch

Figure 37 Watch responsibility location after change.

- The indicator for the new location will flash until acceptedat that location, for example the Watch Bridge Unit panel onthe bridge.


3.2.36 How to call the On Duty engineeror All engineers

From the Remote Operator Station, you can call the On Dutyengineers, or All engineers with engine or cargo qualifications, orwith engine and cargo (multipurpose qualifications). Thefollowing is an example for calling all qualified engineers (Call AllEngine) and for calling the On Duty engineers (Call Engine Duty)Individual ship configurations may vary. This can be done in thefollowing three ways:

On the Operator Control Panel

1 Push the CALL DUTY ENG. or CALL ALL ENG. button.

- The call indicator will be lit and the selected engineer called.

1

CALLDUTYENG.


102 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 To cancel the call push the button again.

On the Watch Bridge Unit

1 Push the CALL DUTY ENG. or CALL ALL ENG. button.


2 To cancel the call push the button again.

On the Remote operator station display



3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select theengineers to call.

Calling officersf Calling Engine Dutyf Calling Cargo DutyF Calling All Enginef Calling All Cargo

Figure 38 Calls all engine qualified officers.

Calling officersF Calling Engine Dutyf Calling Cargo Dutyf Calling All Enginef Calling All Cargo

Figure 39 Calls the On Duty engineer.

4 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Activate call (1=Activate): is displayed at thelower left side of the colour graphics display.

5 Type 1.

CALLALL

ENG.

CALLDUTYENG.

CALLALL

ENG.

1


103AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6 Push ENTER.


7 To cancel the call repeat the procedure selecting CANCELCALL (0=cancel):.

3.2.37 How to define the engineerqualifications

When a new engineer reports aboard with qualifications differentfrom the engineer being replaced, the qualifications table needs tobe updated. The following example shows a qualification changefor the the 3rd engineer:

Officers Qualifications

Officers Qualifications

Chief Engineer Engine1st Engineer Engine2nd Engineer Engine3rd Engineer EngineChief Officer Multipurpose1st Officer Cargo

Figure 40 The qualification section checks that the On Dutyengineer is qualified for the assigned duty.



3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select thequalifications for the engineer.

4 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter qual (0=None, 1=Engine, 2=Cargo,3=Multipurpose): is displayed at the lower left side of thecolour graphics display.

5 Type the relevant number.

6 Push ENTER.

- The new qualifications have been set.


104 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.2.38 How to define watch callingOff-Duty mode

When an engineer or group of engineers are on duty the WatchBridge and Watch Cabin units are automatically set to On Dutymode. When an engineer is Off Duty “his/her” panel(s) can bedefined as either “active” or “passive”:

What is Off Duty active

The panels will not sound an alarm but will continue to displayalarm information. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” infront.

What is Off Duty passive

The panels will not sound an alarm. LCD-type panels will display“date and time” information only. Pushing the controls on aLCD-type panel will display the alarms. Unacknowledged alarmswill have an ”*” in front. (The LEDs on the LED-type panels willremain dark).

1 Use the procedure as described in “How to access the WatchCalling configuration” on page 98.


3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select theengineer.

4 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter panel(s) mode(1=Active, 0=Passive): isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.


6 Push ENTER.

- The new Off-Duty mode have been set.


105AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Off-Duty Panel Mode

Officers Mode

Chief Engineer Active1st Engineer Passive2nd Engineer Passive3rd Engineer PassiveChief Officer Passive1st Officer Passive

Figure 41 engineers Off-Duty panel mode.

3.2.39 How to define Watch Calling panelgroups for on duty engineers

Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as“belonging” to that engineer-position. These are the panels inhis/her cabin, office and in public areas. When an engineer is Onduty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode. Since eachships configuration is different the illustration may differ fromyour system.

Note This configuration can only be done at the master RemoteOperator Station.

1 Use the procedure as described in “How to access the WatchCalling configuration” on page 98.


3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to select thepanel group (Chief Engineer, 1st Engineer etc.).

4 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter Group number to assign panel to: isdisplayed at the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.


6 Push ENTER.

7 Type in the group number.

8 Push ENTER.


106 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

KONGSBERG WATCH CALLING CONFIGURATION 1 of 2 DateTime

Message area which tells you the codes to choose the selection.

1. Public2. Chief Engineer3. 1st Engineer4. 2nd Engineer5. 3rd Engineer6. Chief Officer7. 1st Officer

Panel ConfigurationGroup Mode Last ChangePanel S/N

000000000000010000000000000200000000000003000000000000040000000000000500000000000006000000000000070000000000000800000000000009

Chief Engineer1st Engineer2nd Engineer3rd EngineerChief Officer1st OfficerPublicPublicPublic

OperationalOperationalConnectingOperationalOperationalOperationalOperationalOperationalOperational

11:07:41 08/11--200112:00:00 12/12--200102:03:00 06/10--200110:10:23 07/10--200110:22:09 07/10--200110:28:34 07/10--200110:32:27 07/10--200110:44:12 07/10--200110/56:02 07/10--2001

This column lists the time anddate of change for each panel

GroupsEach panel has a unique serial number. Each panel can bedefined to a ”group” so that all alarms to the ”On Duty”officer are sent to all panels defined for the position, and topublic areas.For example, all panels defined as ”Chief Engineer”will be active when the Chief Engineer is ”On Duty”.

Apply Changes

Figure 42 One of the Watch Calling configuration pages.

9 Place the cursor on the display area APPLY CHANGES andpush the READ button.

- The change is now selected.

10 To apply the change push 1.

11 Push ENTER.

Groups

1. Public2. Chief Engineer3. 1st Engineer4. 2nd Engineer5. 3rd Engineer6. Chief Officer7. 1st Officer

Figure 43 Available Watch Cabin Unit groups.

1


107AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Panel Configuration

Panel S/N Group

00000000000001 Chief Engineer00000000000002 1st Engineer00000000000003 2nd Engineer00000000000004 3rd Engineer00000000000005 Chief Officer00000000000006 1st Officer00000000000007 Public00000000000008 Public00000000000009 Public

Figure 44 Panel serial numbers and group assignment.

3.2.40 How to change time zoneUsed to change time zone when sailing eastward or westward.



2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text afterTimezone.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter password: is displayed in the functionwindow at the lower left side of the colour graphics display.


5 Push ENTER.

- The following dialogue is displayed.

6 Select the new time zone and push OK.

Note If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must bemade there.

3.2.41 How to change system timeNote Use the “change time zone” function above when going between

different time zones. The DataChief C20 system time is set toCoordinated Universal Time (UTC formerly known as GMT), andonly minor corrections such as if the time is not quite correct shouldbe made here!

SYSTEMINFO

DISPLAY


108 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 45 Change Time zone dialogue box.



2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to select the text afterChange system time.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter password: is displayed at the lower leftside of the colour graphics display.


5 Push ENTER.

- The following dialogue is displayed.

Figure 46 Set system time dialogue box.

SYSTEMINFO

DISPLAY


109AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6 Type in the local date and time and push OK.

- The new date and time is transferred to the other RemoteOperator Stations in the network if the Remote OperatorStation you are working at is set up to transfer this data.

7 Select the time zone and push OK.

Note If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must bemade there.

3.2.42 How to make your own list ofselected tags

The system allows you to create up to five display pagescontainingyour own selection of tags. Each page can include up to 20 tags.Tags can be combined from different alarm groups. Do thefollowing:

1 Push the SELECTED POINTS DISPLAY button.

- In the function window in the lower left corner of the colourgraphics display the text Log no. is shown.

2 Enter a number between 1 and 5.

Note If you want to create a new display the number should notpreviously have been used to create a selected points display!

- The texts ADD, DELETE and EXIT will be displayed at thetop of the screen.

3 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to highlight ADD.

4 Push ENTER.

- The text Select group: will be displayed in bottom left of thecolour graphics display.

5 Push the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tags fromor enter the alarm group number.

6 Push ENTER.

- The tags in the selected alarm group are displayed on theright side of the colour graphics display.

7 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want.

8 Push ENTER to select it.

- The selected tag is displayed on the left side of the colourgraphics display.

SELECTEDPOINTSDISPLAY

1-5


110 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

9 If the tag list fills more than one page use the NEXT PAGEand PREVIOUS PAGE buttons to go between them.

10 To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 5. Toselect a tag from a different alarm group go to 3.

11 Should you want to remove a tag from your list use the arrowbuttons to highlight DELETE.

12 Push ENTER.

13 Use the arrow buttons to select the tag you want to remove.

14 Push ENTER.

- The tag is removed from the list.

15 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT.

16 Push ENTER.

- Your list of selected tags is shown with values and limits.

3.2.43 How to change a list of selectedtags

Your list of selected tags can be modified at any time. Rememberthere is a maximum of 20 tags per list. Do the following:


- In the lower left corner of the colour graphics display the textSelect log number: is shown.

2 Enter the number of the selected tags list you want to change(between 1 and 5).

3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to selectCONFIG in the lower right corner.


4 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight ADD ifyou want to add tags and push ENTER. If you want toDELETE tags go to 9.

- The text Select group: will be displayed in bottom left of thecolour graphics display.

5 Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tagsfrom.




111AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003



- The tag is displayed on the left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.


- To select an other tag from the same alarm group go to 6. Toselect a tag from a different alarm group go to 4.


10 Push ENTER.


12 Push ENTER.



14 Push ENTER.

- Your updated list of tags will be displayed with values andlimits.

3.2.44 How to set the interval forselected points log

Note A Selected points log can only be printed from the RemoteOperator Station configured to print this log.



2 Enter the number of the selected tags list you want to log(between 1 and 5).

3 Use the TRACKBALL and the READ button to selectCONFIG in the lower right corner.

- The texts ADD, DELETE ,EXIT and INTERVAL will bedisplayed at the top of the screen.

4 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlightINTERVAL.


1-5


112 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

5 Push ENTER.

- The text Enter log printout interval (hh.mm): will bedisplayed in bottom left of the colour graphics display.

6 Type in the print interval using the specified format (hh.mm)and push ENTER.

7 Push the SPACE button and ENTER when you want toremove the interval.

3.2.45 How to make your own trenddisplay

The system allows you to create up to five different trend logdisplays containing your own selection of tags. Each display caninclude up to eight tags. Tags can be combined from differentalarm groups. The trend log displays input as curves as a functionof time. Do the following:

1 Push the SELECT TREND DISPLAY button.



Note The number should not previously have been used to create a trenddisplay!


3 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow button to highlight ADD.

4 Push ENTER.

- The text Select group: will be displayed in the bottom leftof the colour graphics display.

5 Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tagsfrom or enter the alarm group number.

6 Push ENTER.



SELECTEDTRENDSDISPLAY

1-5


113AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003






12 Push ENTER.


14 Push ENTER.



16 Push ENTER.

- Your trend display of selected tags will be displayed.


114 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 47 Typical trend log display.

Explanation to the trendlog display

• Selected trend tags: Up to eight trend tags can be monitoredsimultaneously. These are displayed in different colours withtheir current value. Use the TRACKBALL and the READ keyto select one of the tags. The value scale will then be displayedin the actual unit (temp, pressure, etc.)for that tag, using trendlow and high range as minimum and maximum values. To selecttags see “How to make your own trend display” above.

• Value scale: Normally 0 to 100% - white scale. When selectingone of the trend tags (see Selected trend tags) the scale will bedisplayed in the same colour as that tag, and will be scaled in theunit for that tag.

- Trend low range: The minimum value for the value scale.Used when selecting one of the trend tags (see Selected trendtags). Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to selectit and type in a new value.

- Trend high range: The maximum value for the value scale.Used when selecting one of the trend tags (see Selected trendtags). Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to selectit and type in a new value.

• Time scale: The selected time scale for the trend display.


115AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Time span: You can vary the time span of the trend displaybetween 6 minutes and 120 hours. Push the button so that thecurrent time span is displayed and use the UP/DOWN arrowkeys to change it.

• Grid: Pushing the button turns the grid on/off.

• Stop: Pushing the button freezes the trend display (no newsamples are added). Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys tomove the trend cursor along the time scale. The value for eachtag will be displayed as the cursor moves along the time scale.

• Config: Push this button to add or delete trend tags. See “Howto make your own trend display” above.

3.2.46 How to make your own bargraphdisplay

The system allows you to create up to five different bargraphdisplays containing your own selection of tags. Each display caninclude up to six tags. Tags can be combined from different alarmgroups. Do the following:

1 Push the SELECT BARGR. DISPLAY button.



Note The number should not previously have been used to create abargraph display!


3 Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to highlight ADD.

4 Push ENTER.


5 Push one of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tagsfrom or enter the alarm group number.

6 Push ENTER.


7 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the tags you want .

SELECTBARGR.DISPLAY

1-5


116 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003






12 Push ENTER.


14 Push ENTER.

- The tag is removed from the list.15 Use the arrow buttons to highlight EXIT.

16 Push ENTER.

- Your bargraph display of selected tags will be displayed.

Figure 48 Typical bargraph display.

Explanation to the bargraph display• Selected bargraph tags: Up to six tags can be displayed

simultaneously. These are displayed with their current value. Toselect tags see “How to make your own trend display” above.


117AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Tag number: The tag number for the selected tag.

• Scale: Bargraph scale

- Bargraph high range: The maximum value for the scale.Use the TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it andtype in a new maximum value.

- Bargraph low range: The minimum value for the scale. Usethe TRACKBALL and the READ key to select it and typein a new minimum value.

• Current value bar: The value of the tag displayed as abargraph.

• Current value: The current value of the tag. The numbers aredisplayed in green when the value is inside the limits and redwhen outside.

• Limits bar: Displays the minimum and maximum alarm limits- if any.

• Maximum alarm limit: The bar is green above this limit andred below.

• Minimum alarm limit: The bar is red above this limit andgreen below.

• Config: Push this button to add or delete bargraph tags. See“How to make your own bargraph display” above.

3.2.47 How to change tag parameters foran analogue channel

This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analoguemeasuring points.



2 Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or pushone of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tagsfrom.

- The alarm group is displayed on the colour graphics display.

3 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select a tag.

4 Push the TAG DETAILS button.

- The parameters for that tag is displayed.

5 There are three buttons at the bottom of the window. Pushthem to display the following:

GROUPDISPLAY

TAGDETAILS


118 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 49 Tag detail display.

* Tag Details: Shows the normal tag details display. Allparameters displayed here can be changed by theoperator. Pushing the Offscan Enable stops checking thistag against alarm limits. Pushing the Offscan Disablestarts checking this tag against alarm limits. PushingOffscan Value allows you to to insert a simulated valuewhen the tag is off scan. This may be used while waitingto replace a defective sensor.

* Advanced Tag Details: Shows a full list of all tag details.All parameters displayed in bold characters can bechanged by the user without a password. Use theParameter Filter on the right side to reduce the numberof parameters displayed.

* Tag application: Lists other tags related to this tag. Onlyused for advanced applications and systemcommissioning.

6 To change a variable point to it ,and push the READ buttonon the operator control panel.

7 Type in the new value and push OK.

- The display picture is updated and the new value istransferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and any otherRemote Operator Station in the system.

The following table explains what the the different parameters foranalogue input tags are used for.

Parametername

Type Adjust-able

Function

Tag name Text Yes Unique code describing a tagTag number Number No Unique number describing a tagDescription Text Yes Description of a tagFunction Text No Short code describing the function of

the tag


119AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

FunctionAdjust-able

TypeParameternameValue Number No Measured value scaled to technical

value and Filtered

Distributed Pro-cessing Unitnumber

Number No Unique number of the node

Channel number Number No Number of the channel connectedChannel Type Channel type is the specification of how

the input signal is handled and scaled

Operator ControlPanel alarmgroup

Number No All tags in the system are divided intodifferent groups.

Bridge group Number No All tags going to the external alarm sys-tem are divided into different groups.

Autolog Number Yes Included in the autolog listNoonlog Number Yes Included in the noonlog listEventlog Number Yes Included in the eventlog listOffscan Number Yes Included in the offscan log list

Offscan value Number Yes Included in the offscan log listInhibited by tag Text No Tag to inhibit this channelAccess group Number Yes Limited access id. to acknowledge this

alarmLimit Alarm Low

LowNumber Yes Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low Number Yes Alarm limitLimit Alarm High Number Yes Alarm limitLimit Alarm High

HighNumber Yes Alarm limit

Limit Event LowLow

Number Yes Event limit

Limit Event Low Number Yes Event limitLimit Event High Number Yes Event limitLimit Event High

HighNumber Yes Event limit

Filter Time *) Number Yes Time in 100 millisecondsDynamic Dead

Band *)Number Yes Report value dead band limit

Counts Low *) Number Yes A/D minimum valueCounts High *) Number Yes A/D maximum valueEng.Units Low *) Number Yes Instrument minimum valueEng.Units High

*)Number Yes Instruments maximum value

Alarm OnDelay1

Number Yes High/ Low delay in 1 second


120 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

FunctionAdjust-able

TypeParametername

Alarm OffDelay1


Alarm OnDelay2

Number Yes HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second

Alarm OffDelay2


Inhibit On Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 secondInhibit Off Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 second

Table 2 Analogue input channel parameters.

*) Requires Eng.Unit change = 1 in System info. display.

3.2.48 How to change tag parameters fora digital channel

This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for digitalmeasuring points.



2 Type in an alarm group number and push ENTER, or pushone of the alarm group buttons to you wish to select tagsfrom.

- The alarm group is displayed on the colour graphics display.

3 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to select a tag.

4 Push the TAG DETAILS button.

- The parameters for that tag is displayed.

5 Use the arrow buttons to select the parameter you wish tochange and push enter.

6 Select for instance High-High alarm limit.

7 Push ENTER.

- The text Enter new limit: will be displayed on the lower leftside of the colour graphics display.

8 Enter a new limit.

9 Push ENTER.

- The display picture is updated and the new value istransferred to the Distributed Processing Unit.

GROUPDISPLAY

TAGDETAILS


121AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

The following table explains what the the different parameters fordigital input tags are used for.

ParameterName

Type Adjust-able

Function

Tag name Text No Unique code describing a tagDescription Text No Description of a tagFunction Text No Short code describing the function of

the tagState Text No Input status after time delay









Inhibited by tag Text No Tag to inhibit this channelAccess group Number Yes Limited access id. to acknowledge this

alarmEnable Event on

OpenYes/No Yes Enable/ disable event

Enable Event onClosed

Yes/No Yes Enable/ disable event

Inhibit On Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 secondInhibit Off Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 secondAlarm On Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 secondAlarm Off Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 secondSignal Cond. On

DelayNumber Yes Delay of signal before handled by alarm

system in 1 secondSignal Cond Off


system in 1 secondSignal Cond In-

vertYes/No Yes Invert input status

Table 3 Digital input channel parameters.

3.2.49 How to change the AutologThe Autolog function is used to print logs a set intervals.


122 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Altering autolog printing time

1 Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG. button.

2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to highlight the time,

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter new time hh.mm: is displayed in thelower left of the display.

4 Type in the new time.

5 Push ENTER.

- The colour graphics display is updated with the new time.

M/S EAGLE NORCONTROLAUTOMATIONA/SKALDNES HULL NO: 10AUTO LOG 93--12--27 12:16:58 PAGE 1

Tagname Tag description Func Value Eng.unit Alarm Low Lim. High lim.

AE001 STARTINGAIR LP 24.5 KG/CM2 ( 18.00, )AE002 CHARGEAIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )FO001 F.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )FO001 F.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )LO001 L.O. PRESS LP OPEN OPEN ( , )LO001 L.O. TEMP LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME001 STARTINGAIR LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME002 CYL.1 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME003 CYL.2 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME004 CYL.3 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )ME005 CYL.4 LUBRICATION LP OPEN OPEN ( , )

DC2000

Table 4 Typical example of an Auto log.

Deleting an autolog printing time

1 Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG button.

2 Use the arrow buttons to highlight the start time to bedeleted.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter new time hh.mm: is displayed in thelower left of the display.

4 Push the SPACE button and then ENTER.

- The selected start time is deleted.

AUTOLOG

CONFIG.

AUTOLOG

CONFIG.


123AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Starting and stopping Autolog

1 Push the AUTO LOG CONFIG button.

2 Use the arrow buttons to highlight Autolog on/off.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Autolog on/off (1-on, 0-off) is displayed in thelower left of the display.

4 A prompt will occur at the bottom left of the screen: “on=1off=0”.

5 Type in 1.

6 Push ENTER to turn autolog on, or type in 0 and pushENTER to turn autolog off.

3.2.50 How to change Deviationparameters

How to change limits

This function is used to set limits for alarm blocking and deviationfrom corrected value such as used for main engine exhaust gastemperature.

1 Push the DEVIATION PARAM. CONFIG. button.

2 Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to highlight theparameter you want to change, for instance the limit foralarm blocking.

3 Push ENTER.

- The prompt Enter new value: is displayed in the lower leftof the display.

4 Type in the new value.

5 Push ENTER.

- The new value is displayed.

- Use this procedure to change any value on this display.

Note When the average temperature is below a preset value, thedeviation alarm is blocked.

AUTOLOG

CONFIG.

1

DEVIATIONPARAM.CONFIG.


124 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 50 Typical Deviation parameter configuration display,your display may differ.

How to make profile correction

The average cylinder temperature is used as reference fordeviations. For this reason it is necessary to correct the temperatureof each cylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders asreference. This correction is done when running the engine at fullload and can be done in two ways:

Automatic correction


2 Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight thetext Auto after “Profile correction”.

3 Push ENTER.

- All values found for “Current deviation:” are moved to“Correction:” and “Current deviation:” should read “0” forall cylinders.

Manual correction


2 Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight thetext Man after “Profile correction”.




125AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3 Use the TRACKBALL and READ button to highlight thevalue for each cylinder after the text “Correction”. Type inthe value for each cylinder one by one.

- The value for each cylinder under “Current deviation:”should read “0”.

→ For information about ”Exhaust mean value tag items” refer topage 224.


126 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.3 Midi Operator Station

3.3.1 How to handle alarm eventsWhen a process parameter enters an alarm state, the followingtakes place:

- The buzzer is activated.

- The alarm is indicated in red at the bottom of the display.

- External alarm devices such as engine room horns areactivated.

- The last unacknowledged alarm is displayed in red at thebottom of the display.

Do the following:

1 Push to turn any audible alarm off.

- This turns off the buzzer and any external alarm devices.

2 Push the ACK button.

- This acknowledges the alarm displayed at the bottom of thedisplay (the last alarm).

- This alarm text disappears.

3 Push the ACK button again to acknowledge the next to lastalarm and so on untill no alarms are unacknowledged.

4 Attend to the alarm situation.

3.3.2 How to display alarm history

Figure 51 Typical alarm history display.

1 Push Menu to display the main menu. From some displaypictures it may be required to push Menu twice before themain menu is displayed.

ACK

ACK

MENU


127AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.

3 Push 1 to display the Alarm History.

4 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through allalarms a page at a time.

5 Push Enter to display alarm details.

3.3.3 How to display alarm summary



3 Push 2 to display the Alarm Summary.

4 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through allalarms a page at a time.


3.3.4 How to display alarm groupinformation



3 Push 3 to display the Alarm History.

4 Use the Navigator key to select an alarm group.

5 Push Enter.

6 Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display allavailable information for each tag group.

1

1

ENTER

MENU

1

2

ENTER

MENU

1

3

ENTER


128 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


3.3.5 How to set the keyboard andscreen configuration


2 Push 6 to display the Configuration Menu.

3 Push 2 to display parameters for Keyboard and Screen.

4 Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select theitem you want to change.

Keyboard light and screen backlight

5 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to set the newvalue.

6 Push Enter.

Keyboard click

7 Push Enter.

8 Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select Onor Off.

9 Push Enter.

3.3.6 How to change access levelAn access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledgealarms and change system parameters or information. The statusof this system is available as follows:


2 Push 6 to display the Configuration menu.

ENTER

MENU

6

2

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

MENU

6


129AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3 Push 1 to go to User Access.

- The user access levels are displayed.

* On: Indicates that access at this level is possible.

* Off: Indicates that access at this level is not possible.

Note Only one user access level can be selected at a time.

The access control system is based on the use of passwords. Thefollowing access levels are available:

- Monitoring: Only for viewing information.

- User: Allows system control through the mimic pictures.Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) componentsyou normally don’t have access to, such as for instanceoperating the power management from the cargo controlroom.

- Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays,event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Accessautomatically expire after 30 minutes.

- Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarmdelays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups,enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for eachRemote Operator Station. Access automatically expire after30 minutes.

Note Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allowsunauthorized access to vital system functions.

Note If you try to make changes without having inserted the rightpassword the system will automatically request it.

3.3.7 How to display information aboutDPUs, tags and tag details

Distributed processing units are often abbreviated DPU’s.


2 Push 2 to display the DPU Overview.

3 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through allDPU’s a page at a time.

4 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to step througheach DPU one at a time.

1

MENU

2


130 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

5 For information about the tags for a particular DPU, selectthe DPU and push Enter.

6 Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display allavailable information for each tag.

Tag details view

7 Push Enter to display the parameters for a particular tag -Tag Details View.

Figure 52 Tag details display.

Tag menu

8 Push Menu.

9 The Tag Menu is displayed.

- This menu allows you to display various information abouteach tag as follows:

10 Push 1 to display the parameters for this particular tag - TagDetails View.

11 Push 2 to display a mimic picture for this tag. Use thefunction keys to operate the the tag when available.

12 Push 3 to display the Alarm status for this tag (if any).

3.3.8 How to change tag parametersThis function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogueand digital measuring points.


ENTER

ENTER

MENU

1

2

4

MENU


131AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 Push 2 to display the DPU Overview.

3 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to select thedistributed processing unit.

4 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select thedistributed processing unit you want.

5 Push Enter.

6 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to display allavailable tags for the distributed processing unit.

7 Push Enter to display the parameters for the selected tag.

8 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select theparameter you want to change.

- Colours are used to indicate if the current access level allowsa parameter to be changed:* Grey parameter text: Can not be changed at current

access level setting.* Black parameter text: Parameter can be changed.

Note If you try to make changes without having inserted the rightpassword the system will automatically request it.

9 Push Enter.- A parameter entry window is displayed.

10 Clear the existing value using the Clr button.

11 Type in the new value.

Note A red text indicates that you have typed in an illegalvalue. If you make an error push Esc to cancel theinput.

12 Push Enter.

- The new value is inserted. The display picture is updated andthe new value is transferred to the Distributed ProcessingUnit and other Remote- and Midi Operator Stations in thesystem.

Analogue input tag parametersThe following table explains what the the different parameters foranalogue input tags are used for.

2

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

CLR

0 - 9

ESC

ENTER


132 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Parametername

Type Adjust-able

Function

Tag name Text No Unique code describing a tagTag number Number No Unique number describing a tagDescription Text Yes Description of a tag









Offscan value Number Yes Included in the offscan log listInhibited by tag Text No Tag to inhibit this channelAccess group Number Yes Limited access id. to acknowledge this

alarmLimit Alarm Low

LowNumber Yes Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low Number Yes Alarm limitLimit Alarm High Number Yes Alarm limitLimit Alarm High

HighNumber Yes Alarm limit

Limit Event LowLow


Limit Event Low Number Yes Event limitLimit Event High Number Yes Event limitLimit Event High

HighNumber Yes Event limit

Filter Time Number Yes Time in 100 millisecondsDynamic Dead

BandNumber Yes Report value dead band limit

Counts Low Number Yes A/D minimum valueCounts High Number Yes A/D maximum valueEng.Units Low Number Yes Instrument minimum valueEng.Units High Number Yes Instruments maximum valueAlarm OnDelay1



133AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

FunctionAdjust-able

TypeParametername

Alarm OffDelay1


Alarm OnDelay2


Alarm OffDelay2


Inhibit On Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 secondInhibit Off Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 second

Table 5 Analogue input channel parameters.

Digital input tag parameters

The following table explains what the the different parameters fordigital input tags are used for.

ParameterName

Type Adjust-able

Function

Tag name Text No Unique code describing a tagDescription Text No Description of a tagFunction Text No Short code describing the function of

the tagState Text No Input status after time delay









Inhibited by tag Text No Tag to inhibit this channelAccess group Number Yes Limited access id. to acknowledge this

alarmEnable Event on

OpenYes/No Yes Enable/ disable event

Enable Event onClosed

Yes/No Yes Enable/ disable event

Inhibit On Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 second


134 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

FunctionAdjust-able

TypeParameterName

Inhibit Off Delay Number Yes Inhibit delay in 1 secondAlarm On Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 secondAlarm Off Delay Number Yes Delay in 1 secondSignal Cond. On


system in 1 secondSignal Cond Off


system in 1 secondSignal Cond In-

vertYes/No Yes Invert input status

Table 6 Digital input channel parameters.

3.3.9 How to change alarm limits→ Refer to page 130 How to change parameters.

3.3.10 How to change alarm delay→ Refer to page 130 How to change parameters.


135AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.4 Local Operator Station

3.4.1 How to view alarms

Note The following is only relevant when the Local Operator Station issett up as a local alarm system.

When an alarm occurs, the appointed Local Operator Station willdisplay the alarm message, sound the buzzer and activate the horn.The display will look like this:

Alarm!

|View| |Ignore|

Figure 53 Alarm display.

1 To silence the buzzer and horn, push SOUND OFF.

2 To go back to what was previously displayed on the LocalOperator Station push F4 (Ignore).

3 To view the new alarm push F1 (View), this will take you tothe top of the alarm history.

3.4.2 How to acknowledge alarms- Unacknowledged alarms have an”*” in front of the alarm

message.

1 In the Alarm History, Alarm Summary and Alarm Details anunacknowledged alarm event or tag can be acknowledged byselecting it and pushing ACK.

2 The state will change from unacknowledged toacknowledged or back to normal if the alarm condition is nolonger present.

3.4.3 How to turn the sound off

1 To silence the buzzer and horn push SOUND OFF.

3.4.4 How to display and interpret alarmhistory

The Alarm history can be reached in two ways:


136 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1 When the alarm display is shown push F1.

2 Select Alarm History from the top menu.

3 Push ENTER.

Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 ALARM HISTORY>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH *12.09:57:03 LO0034 Alm Low 12.09:40:21 Fo0044 Alm High

Figure 54 Typical alarm history display.

- All Local Operator Station’s that can connect to aDistributed Process Unit can view its alarm history andacknowledge alarms.

- The alarm history is a list of the last 40 alarms for a specificDistributed Processing Unit. Alarms are sorted by time, thelast alarm event at the top.

- Line 1 of alarm history display shows current time and thetext ALARM HISTORY. The following lines display alarmevents.

- The “>” symbol indicates that the alarm is selected.

4 Use SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN to move up anddown in the list.

5 The DEFAULT button moves you to the top of the list.

- Each alarm event line shows the following data:

Tag name

Alarm event typeIf no event for thistag the highestalarm state isdisplayed.

>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH

Alarm state* = Unacknowledged. = Acknowledged = Normal

Time of alarmeventDay of month,hours : minutes :seconds

EventAlm = AlarmRet = Return = No even

Figure 55 Alarm event interpretation.


137AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6 An unacknowledged alarm, in focus, can be acknowledgedby pushing the ACK button.

7 Push MENU DOWN or ENTER to display alarm details.

3.4.5 How to display and interpret alarmdetails

Alarm details is used to provide more information about an alarm.

1 Select Alarm History as described above.

2 Push ENTER.

3 Select the alarm you want Alarm Details for usingSELECT UP or SELECT DOWN.

4 Push ENTER.

Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 ALARM HISTORY>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFHMAIN ENGINE BEARING TEMP 511.2 DEG.C IFH

Figure 56 Alarm details display.

5 An unacknowledged alarm is acknowledged by pushingACK.

6 SELECT UP, SELECT DOWN and DEFAULT buttonscan be used to move up and down in the list.

- If the alarm conditions has returned to normal the field is leftblank.

7 Push MENU UP to return to Alarm History.


138 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

HIGHEST ALARMSTATE PRESENT

*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFHMAIN ENGINE BEARING TEMP 511.7 DEG.C IFH

ENGINEERINGUNIT

TAGDESCRIPTION

CURRENTVALUE

Tag name

Alarm event typeIf no event for thistag the highestalarm state isdisplayed

EventAlm = AlarmRet = Return = No even

Alarm state* = Unacknowledged. = Acknowledged = Normal

Time of dayDay of month,hours : minutes :seconds

Figure 57 Alarm details interpretation.

3.4.6 How to display alarm summary

1 From the top menu select Alarm Summary and pushENTER.

- All Local Operator Stations that can connect to a DistributedProcess Unit can view Alarm Summary and acknowledgealarms.

- Alarm summary is a list of the last alarms orunacknowledged states. If the event have returned to normalthe tag data is still displayed and the alarm field will containthe highest alarm present.

Wed May 12 10:01:51 2001 ALARM SUMMARY>*12 09:58:22 ME0010 Alm IFH *12.09:57:03 LO0034 Alm Low 12.09:40:21 Fo0044 Alm High

Figure 58 Alarm summary display.


139AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.5 Watch calling system

3.5.1 How to receive a call

- When you receive a call one of the watch location buttons areflashing.

1 Push SOUND OFF to acknowledge the call.

Figure 59 Buttons used to receive a call. Button texts will vary.

3.5.2 How to respond to alarms

When an alarm condition occur, the buzzer will sound and thealarm will be indicated on the Watch Bridge Unit. Do thefollowing:

1 Push SOUND OFF.

2 Read the alarm information on the display or the text next tothe indicator. The ON DUTY engineer should also receivethe alarm indicator and take appropriate action.

3 After a time check that the alarm is no longer displayed onthe Watch Bridge Unit after the alarm condition is corrected.

3.5.3 How to call the ON DUTY engineer

1 Push the CALL XXX (button texts will vary) button tonotify the ON DUTY engineer to contact the bridge.

- The LED indicator will flash until the ON DUTY engineerhas acknowledged the call. Then it will be steady lit.

2 To terminated the call push the button again.

Figure 60 Buttons used to call on duty engineer. Button textswill vary.


140 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.5.4 How to transfer watchresponsibility

1 Push WATCH RESPONSIBILITY to notify the otherlocations to accept the transfer of the watch responsibility.

- The LED indicator will flash until the transfer isacknowledged. When the indicator is steady lit watchresponsibility has been transferred.

Figure 61 Buttons used to transfer watch responsibility. Buttontexts may vary.

3.5.5 How to accept watch responsibility- When the indicator for your location begins to flash,

1 Push the button for your watch location.

2 This acknowledges and accepts the transfer of watchresponsibility to you.

3.6 Watch Bridge Unit

3.6.1 How to display alarm informationwhen in off duty mode

- In Off Duty mode, all Watch Bridge Units can be defined aseither active or passive This is done as part of theconfiguration in one of the Remote Operator Stations.


141AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Off Duty ACTIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms but all LED indicators andthe display will show alarm conditions.

Off Duty PASSIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms.

- LCD-type panels will display date and time informationonly. Pushing the controls on a LCD panel will display thealarms.

- The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.

Figure 62 Watch Bridge Unit controls.

3.7 Watch Cabin Unit

3.7.1 How to display alarm informationwhen duty mode

- In Off Duty mode, all Watch Cabin Units can be defined aseither active or passive This is done as part of theconfiguration in one of the Remote Operator Stations.

Off Duty ACTIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms but all LED indicators andthe display will show alarm conditions.

Off Duty PASSIVE

- The panel will not sound alarms.

- LCD-type panels will display date and time informationonly. Pushing the controls on a LCD panel will display thealarms.

- The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.


142 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3.8 Using ShipViewer

3.8.1 Main ShipViewer functionsShipViewer has the following main functions:

• Counter display

• Alarm displays

• DPU displays

• Deviation displays

• Alarm group displays

• Alarm summery displays

• Alarm history displays

• Selected points display

• Selected trend display

• Selected bargraph display

• Mimic diagrams as found in the Remote Operator Station

3.8.2 Understanding the ShipViewerdisplay

Overview

All ShipViewer functions are available through the menus bar andthe most frequently used functions are also directly availablethrough the toolbar buttons. These are further described in thefollowing.

Menu barToolbar buttons

Figure 63 ShipViewer menu and tool bar.

Toolbar buttons

Print screen

Save image to disk

Print preview

Open image file


143AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Display version and build information

Previous window

Next window , for when you have used previous window

Alarm summary display.

Alarm history display

Alarm group display.

Running hours display.

DPU display.

Deviation display.

Colour codes for data displays

The channel data is colour coded as follows:

- Green: The channel is in a normal state.

- Yellow: The channel is in an alarm state and acknowledged.

- Red: The channel is in an alarm state and not acknowledged.

- Cyan: The channel is in a high priority alarm state.

- Blue: The channel is inhibited.

- Grey: Not updated or invalid values.

Thebackground colourcan be set to eitherdark blueor white.Darkblue is better to view some coloured texts, while white is better forprinting.

1 In the menu bar select Settings and either select or clear Nobackground color.

3.8.3 Explanation to the displays

Alarm summary display

The alarm summery display shows currently active alarm entries.Alarms acknowledged and returned to normal state are notdisplayed. The information is instantly updated as soon assomething happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time.


144 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm group display

The alarm group display shows all measuring points in thepredefined alarm groups. These group where defined duringcommissioning of the DataChiefC20. When selecting the alarmgroup display, a dialog containing all alarm groups appear on thescreen. In this dialog all alarm groups with active alarms areindicated by a red dot.

1 Select an alarm group by pushing its button .

2 To go between alarm group view and group view push theAlarm Display/Group Display button (at the bottom)repeatedly.

- The alarm and group displays are sorted by tag name.

Alarm history display

The alarm history display shows both active and alarms returnedto normal.

1 Scroll through the pages using the Page Up and Page Downbuttons on the keyboard.

- The information is instantly updated as soon as somethinghappens. Alarms are sorted by date and time.

Counter display

The counter display shows counters and lap counters for suchcomponents as pumps, generators, engines, etc. included incounter system on DataChief C20.

Distributed Processing Unit display

The Distributed Processing Unit (DPU) display shows allmeasuring points connected to each DPU.

1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Downbuttons on the keyboard.

Deviation display

The deviation display shows exhaust deviation data for all engineshaving deviation calculations in the DataChief C20.

1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Downbuttons on the keyboard.


145AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Selected points display

The selected points display shows one of up to five groupscontaining customer selected tags. Each display can include up to20 tags.

Note More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may becascaded or tiled when required (See the Windows drop downmenu). However when you want to configure a new display allother windows must be closed!

Display existing tag selection

1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected pointsdisplay.

2 Select one of the five groups and push OK.

- The selected points display is shown.

Make or alter tag selection

1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected pointsdisplay.


- The selected points display is shown.

3 Push the Config button.

- The Selected Points Configuration dialog is displayed.

4 Use the Select pull down menu to select system.

5 Select tags and push Add.

- The selected points display can be selected from any of thedifferent systems available. Select up to twenty tags.

6 Push OK.

Selected trend display

The selected trends display shows one of up to five groupscontaining customer selected tags. Each display can include up toeight tags.



1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected trenddisplay.


- The selected trend display is shown.


146 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3 Push the Time button to select trend sample time.

4 Push Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again.

5 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window.


1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected trenddisplay.


- The selected trend display is shown.



4 Select a system under Select.


- The selected trend display can be selected from any of thedifferent systems available. Select up to eight tags.

6 Push OK.

7 Push the Time button to select trend sample time.

8 Push Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again.

9 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window.

Selected bargraph display

The selected bargraph display shows one of up to five bargraphdisplay pages containing customer selected tags. Each display caninclude up to twelve tags.



1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected bargraphdisplay.


- The selected bargraph display is shown.


1 In the Displays drop down menu select Selected bargraphdisplay.


- The selected bargraph display is shown.


147AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003



4 Use the Select pull down menu to select system.


- The selected points display can be selected from any of thedifferent systems available. Select up to twelve tags.

6 Push OK.

Mimic diagrams

All mimic diagrams found in the Remote Operator Station areavailable through the ShipViewer. The number and design of thesemimic diagrams are ship dependent.

1 Push the Mimics button on menu bar.

2 Select mimic diagrams from the drop down list.

Figure 64 ShipViewer mimic selection.

3.8.4 How to print displayed information

Use the following procedure to print the information seen on thecolour graphics display.

1 Select the No background color” is in the Settings menu.

- This reduces the amount of ink used when printing.

Figure 65 ShipViewer Settings menu.


148 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 Push the print icon in the tool bar.

3.8.5 How to save ShipViewer imagesUse the following procedure to save the image seen on the colourgraphics display.

1 Push the save icon in the tool bar.

- A standard file save dialog is displayed.

2 Enter filename and a location and push Save.

- Use any program for handling pictures or bit maps to viewthe file.

Figure 66 ShipViewer Save dialog.

3.8.6 How to view saved mimic diagramfiles

Use the following procedure to view previously saved image.

1 Push the open icon in the tool bar.

- A standard file open dialog is displayed.

2 Select filename and a location and push Open.

- The file will be displayed using Paint - a Microsoft programfor viewing, editing or creating bitmap images.


149AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 67 Typical open file window.


150 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

4.1 IntroductionThis chapter teaches you how to use the process control system ofthe DataChief C20. It is intended for personnel familiar with the“Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sections of thismanual. The following subjects are covered:

- Remote Operator Station process control

- Local Operator Station process control

4.2 About the process control systemThe following describes the DataChief C20 process controlsystem. It can control the following types of equipment:

• Pumps

• Fans

• Compressors

• Valves

It includes:

• PID controllers

Process control system

151AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


4.3.1 How to operate a pump starter

Pump starter functions

To control pumps the following functions and features areavailable:

• Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two differentdirections.

• Alarm reporting for start and stop failure.

• Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded.

• Auto & manual control.

• Automatic timedelayedrestartwhenrecovering fromblackout.

• Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or duringblackout.

• Automatic shut down.

• Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowingthe system to record time of starting, running and stopping.

Pump starter types

The following types of pumps can be operated:

• Single speed: One speed control in one direction.

• Two speed: Two speed in the same direction.

• Two directional: One speed in two directions.

• All speed: Two speed in two directions.

• Single acting: One speed with steady relay control.

Pump symbols

Different pump symbols are used to indicate different types ofpumps.

Figure 68 One way, one speed pump.

Figure 69 One way, two speed pump at low speed.

Figure 70 One way, two speed pump at high speed.

Figure 71 Two way, one speed pump going forward.


152 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 72 Two way, one speed pump going in reverse.

Figure 73 Two way, two speed pump going forward at lowspeed.

Figure 74 Two way, two speed pump going forward at highspeed.

Figure 75 Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at lowspeed.

Figure 76 Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at highspeed.

Pump symbol colours

Pump symbols have colours according to the state they are in:

Arrow outline colour

- Green: Running

- Grey: Stopped

Arrow fill colour

For two-speed pumps only:

- Arrow fill green: Full speed

- Arrow outline green: Low speed

Circle colour

- Green: Running and remote

- Grey: Stopped and remote

- Blue: Blocked

- Red: Alarm

- White: Local - not ready

- Yellow: Standby

Parameters

Timeout: Time out for start and stop commands.

Waitchangedirection:Wait timewhenchanging speeddirection.

Pulse on: Pulse duration for start and stop commands.

Blackout restart time: The time the equipment is blocked fromauto restarting after a blackout.


153AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Stopped time: Stand still time when changing speed with stoppulse

Alarm and event enable

Parameters for enabling and disabling alarms and events areavailable. Some alarms must be enabled at all times due toclassification society requirements. Start fail and trip alarms areamong these. The following conditions will result in alarms, andthe starter will be set to manual:

• Trip

• Start failure

• Stop failure

• Started without commanded

Modes

The starter can be operated in two different modes; auto andmanual.

- Auto: A unit can be automatically started and stopped.

- Manual: Only manual start and stop is possible.

Restart after blackout applies to both auto and manual modes. Thefunction is activated when the timer is set to a value larger thanzero, and the blackout detector is referred to by the tag reference.The shut down and start block functions are active both in auto andmanual modes.

Single acting control

A relay is used to start and stop the controlled unit. The relay isclosed as long as the unit is meant to be running, and opened whenthe unit is meant to be stopped. This functionality applies to oneway, one speed units only.

If the the controlled unit does not include a sensor to know if it itrunning, the starter will generate the feedback signal internally. Inthis way, the event information sent from the starter includes thecurrent running information.

Blackout

Some equipment starters (provided by some manufacturers) havethe local/remote switch connected serially with the power failureswitch. On a blackout, the starter will lose the remote signal. It isimportant that the starter detects the blackout before it is set tolocal, and that the remote signal is back before the starter receivesrecover from blackout. To solve this set the delay to off at therunning and remote feedback, and the delay to on for the systemblackout signal.


154 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

System blackout

Actual blackout

Running feedback

Remote feedbackRecover

Figure 77 Blackout sequence as described above.

How to start one way one speed pumps

1 Select the mimic display showing the pump.

2 Move the cursor over the pump you want to start.

3 Push READ.

- The pump is selected.

- The circle around the pump starts flashing.

4 Push ACTIVATE/START

- The pump symbol turns green.

- The pump status changes to Running.

How to stop one way one speed pumps


2 Move the cursor over the pump you want to stop.

3 Push READ.



4 Push DEACTIVATE/STOP.

- The pump symbol turns grey.

- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL,.

How to operate two way and to speed pumps


2 Move the cursor over the pump you want to operate.

3 Push READ.


- Dependent on the pump type one of the following windowsis displayed:

1

0


155AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 78 Menu for two speed pump

Figure 79 Menu for two way pump

Figure 80 Menu for two speed, two way pump. Actualtext may differ.

To start and stop

4 Move the cursor over the Start or Stop button.

5 Push READ.

- The valve symbol changes colour to green for start, or greyfor stop.

To change speed or direction

6 Move the cursor over the corresponding option button.

7 Push READ.

8 Move the cursor over the Start button.

9 Push READ.

Note When changing direction the pump will stop, and start in thereverse direction after a delay. The delay is configurable.

How to reset pumps

The pump logic must be reset when the pump has tripped or as theresult of a start failure.

1 Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm

2 Correct the problem.


ALARMACK


156 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the pump you want toreset.

5 Push READ.



6 Push RESET.

- The circle around the pump symbol changes from red togrey.

Standby pump systems

A standby system includes a pump symbol for each standby pump.The priority number defines which pump will start first - lowestnumber first. The running pump need not have the lowest number.When two pumps have the same standby number, both will startsimultaneously. If no pump is running, the pump with the lowestnumber will start at group start.

AUTO (1)

STANDBY (2)

AUTO

Pump symbol

Priority

Pressure indicator

Auto or manual modes

Figure 81 Symbol for standby pump system.

Standby system auto and manual modes

The standby system can be set to one of two modes:

- Auto: For normal standby system operation from theRemote Operator Station.

- Manual: The standby pump system is disabled. Pumps canbe manually operated.

1 Select the mimic display showing the standby pumps.

2 Move the cursor over the standby pumps controller symbol.

3 Push READ.

- The standby pump controller is selected.

- The text background starts flashing.

RESET

AUTO


157AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

4 Push Auto/man.

- The controller changes between auto and manual. The textbackground changes between green and grey.

* Green - auto

* Grey - manual

How to start a standby pump system

To operate a pump system i standby mode the pump controller andeach of the pumps must be set to auto. Then one of the pumps mustbe started.



3 Push READ.



4 Push Auto/man.

- The text background turns green and the text changes toAuto.

5 Move the cursor over each of the pumps in the pump system.

6 Push READ.



7 Push Auto/man.

- The pump status changes to auto.

8 When all pumps are set to auto, move the cursor over thepump you want to start.


- The pump symbol turns green.

- The pump status changes to Running, auto.

How to stop a standby pump system

To takeapump systemoutof standby mode set the pump controllerto manual and stop the running pump if required.

AUTOMAN

MANUAL

AUTOMAN

AUTO

AUTOMAN

1


158 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003



3 Push READ.



4 Push Auto/man.

- The text background turns grey.

- The controller is set to manual.

5 If you want to stop the running pump, move the cursor overit.

6 Push READ.



7 Push DEACTIVATE/STOP


- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL.,manual.

How to take a pump out of the standby system

To take a pump out of the standby system set the pumps to manual.


2 Move the cursor over the pump.

3 Push READ.



4 Push Auto/man.

- The pump status changes to manual.

5 If you need to stop the pump, push DEACTIVATE/STOP


- The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL.,manual.

AUTO

AUTOMAN

MANUAL

0

AUTOMAN

0


159AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

How to put a pump back into the standby system

To put a pump into the standby system set the pumps to auto.


2 Move the cursor over the pump.

3 Push READ.



4 Push Auto/man.

- The pump status changes to auto.

How to handle a failure to a running pump

When a pump fails it is detected through a drop in pressure.

- The pressure indicator turns yellow indicating a drop inpressure.

- The 1.st standby pump starts.

- The failing pump goes to manual. It will keep on running orstop dependent on how the system is configured.

1 Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm.


How to set standby priority

A standby pump system will normally consist of two or threepumps.

1 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as master.

2 Push READ.



3 Push Master.

- The text changes to standby (1).

1 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as firststandby.

2 Push READ.

- The pump is selected. The circle around the pump startsflashing.

AUTOMAN

ALARMACK

MASTER


160 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

3 Push 1.st standby.


1 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as nextstandby.

2 Push READ.



3 Push Next standby.


4.3.2 How to operate a fan starter

Fan starter functions

To control fans the following functions and features are available:

• Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two differentdirections.





• Blocking from operation when Local switch or blackout.


• Optional time stamp on every change ofoperation, allowing thesystem to record time of starting, running and stopping.

Fan starter types

The following types of starters can be operated:

• Single speed: One speed control in one direction.

• Two speed: Two speed in one direction.

• Two directional: One speed in two directions.

• All speed: Two speed in two directions.

• Single acting: One speed with steady relay control.

Fan symbols

Different fan symbols are used to indicate different types of fans.

1.STSTAND

BY

NEXTSTAND

BY


161AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 82 One way, one speed fan.

Figure 83 One way, two speed fan at low speed.

Figure 84 One way, two speed fan at high speed.

Figure 85 Two way, one speed fan going forward.

Figure 86 Two way, one speed fan going in reverse.

Figure 87 Two way, two speed fan going forward at low speed.

Figure 88 Two way, two speed fan going forward at high speed.

Figure 89 Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at lowspeed.

Figure 90 Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at highspeed.

Fan symbol colours

Arrow outline colour

- Green: Running

- Grey: Stopped

Arrow fill colour

For two-speed fans only!

- Shape filled green: Full speed

- Shape outline green: Low speed

Circle colour



- Blue: Blocked

- Red: Alarm


- Yellow: Standby


162 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

How to start a fan1 Select the mimic display showing the fan.

2 Move the cursor over the fan.

3 Push READ.

- The fan is selected.- The circle around the fan starts flashing.


- The fan symbol turns green.

How to stop a fan1 Select the mimic display showing the fan.

2 Move the cursor over the fan.

3 Push READ.

- The fan is selected.- The circle around the fan starts flashing.


- The fan symbol turns grey.

How to reset a fanThe fan logic must be reset when a fan has tripped or as the resultof a start failure.

1 Push Alarm Ack to acknowledge the alarm.

2 Correct the problem, if any.

3 Select the mimic display showing the fan.

4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the fan you want to reset.

5 Push READ.

- The fan is selected. The circle around the fan starts flashing.

6 Push RESET.

- The circle around the fan symbol changes from red to grey.

4.3.3 How to operate a compressorThe main purpose of the compressor starter is to control thecompressors in a compressed air system. The compressor starterprovidesautomatic start on lowpressureand stop on high pressure.The compressed air system may include one or more compressorswith analogue or binary pressure sensors. The figure describes acompressor system with one common analogue pressure signal.

1

0

ALARMACK

RESET


163AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

LEADER

FOLLOVER AIR RESERVOIR

P

Figure 91 A 2-compressor system with common pressuresensor.

The compressor starter monitors pressure and running signals.Compressors are started if the pressure is lower than the set limitand stopped if it is higher. The following functions are handled:

Compressor starter functions

To control compressor the following functions and features areavailable:





• Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or duringblackout.


• Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowingthe system to record time of starting, running and stopping.

Compressor control types

• Analogue pressure 1: One analogue pressure.

• Analogue pressure 2: Two analogue pressures.

• Binary pressure with hysteresis: Pressure switches with builtin hysteresis.

• Binary pressure without hysteresis: Separate pressureswitches for start and stop.

Compressor symbols

Compressors have the following symbol.

Figure 92 Compressor symbol.

Compressor symbol colours

Compressor symbols have colours according to the state they arein.


164 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Arrow colour

- Green: Running

- Grey: Stopped

Circle colour



- Blue: Blocked

- Red: Alarm


- Yellow: Standby

Leader follower compressor system

A leader follower compressor system includes a symbol for eachcompressor. The symbol is described above.

LEADER

FOLLOVER

AUTO

Compressor symbol

Auto or manual modes

Figure 93 Leader follower compressor system.

Priorities

For automatic operation, the compressor starter must be set to automode. The compressor starter assigns different start and stoppriorities as follows:

• Leader

• 1.st follower

• 2.nd follower

• 3.rd follower

A compressor can only have one priority at a time. The prioritydefines in which order thecompressorswill start and stop.Thestartsetting for the 1.st follower must be lower or equal to the leaderstart setting and the stop setting for the first follower must be loweror equal to the leader stop setting. All followers are stopped whenthe leader stop setting is reached. For systems with analoguepressure sensors all followers are stopped when reaching thealarmhigh high limit.


165AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Pressure tags

Command timeout: The time the starter will wait beforesignalling command timeout.

Pressure filter:The length of time thepressuremay stay belowthestart limit before the compressor is started.

Wait pressure at start: When a compressor is starting, a newcompressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above thestart limit when this timer has expired.

Blackout recover: The time the compressors are blocked fromauto restarting after a blackout.

Start/stop conditions

Start and stop conditions are adjustable by changing parameters.

Start

Systems using both binary and analogue pressure sensors haveseparate start settings for each priority. Start conditions are:

• Pressure lower than the start limit.

• When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started ifthe pressure has not increased to above the start limit when a settime has expired.

Stop

The stop limit can be the same for all compressors, or individual.When analogue pressure sensors are used, each priority hasseparate stop settings. When binary pressure sensors are used,separate sensors can be used to define the stop limit for eachpriority. A common stop sensor can also be used. All priorities arestopped by the stop leader setting. Stop conditions are:

• Pressure higher than the stop limit.

• Stop leader signal is active.

• High-high pressure.

Auto

Two modes exist, auto and manual. Select auto mode to set thecompressor automation functionality in operation. Auto modeoperation requires that the starter is not blocked, or in any waydisabled from operating.

The following gives different examples for start and stopcondition:

Leader control

The leader compressor has its own start and stop limits.


166 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Stop leader

pressure

timeStart leader

Figure 94 Leader start stop limits.

Start follower on pressure drop

Each priority has its own start and stop settings. A compressor setto a priority will start when the pressure lowers below its startsetting, and stop when the pressure rises above its stop setting.

Stop leaderpressure

time

Start leader & first follower

Start leader

Stop first follower & leader

Stop first follower

Start first follower

Figure 95 Start 1.st follower on pressure setting.

pressure

time

Start leader & two followers

Start leader

Stop compressors


Start second follower

Common stop setting

Figure 96 Start two followers on pressure setting.

Start follower after a time delay

The 1.st follower can start on its own pressure setting, or a timedelay aftera start condition for the leadercompressor.The2.nd and3.rd followers will start in similar ways. There is no delayed starton the start conditions for the topping up compressor.

pressure

time

Start leader

start leader

Start follower on timer

start delay = T4

Figure 97 Start follower after a time delay - principle diagram.


167AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

In the illustration below, the third follower will start after a timedelay. The timer is started when the 2.nd follower meets its startconditions. If the pressure falls below third followers startconditionsbefore the timerhasexpired, the third follower will startimmediately.

Stop leaderpressure

time


Start leader

Stop followers & leader

Stop first follower

Start first followerStart second follower

Stop second follower

Start third follower



Start delay

Figure 98 Start followers after a time delay.

The followers are started on timer. The timer is started when theleader has start conditions. If the first and second compressor doesnot start on their own start settings, the third follower is started 3times; start delay after the leader had its start condition.

Stop leaderpressure

time


Start leader

Stop first follower





Stop third follower


dT = Start delay

stop

dT

Start timer third follower = 3dT

2dT


Figure 99 Follower start timers.

In the illustration below, the followers are started after timedelays.The delay starts when the leader meets its start conditions. If thefirst follower meets it own start condition (before the delay hasexpired), the second and third followers will reset their timers, andcount the time from this event.

pressure

time

Start leader

Start leader

Common stop setting




Start first

dT = Start delay

stop

dT

Start third timer = 3dT (interrupted)

Start third timer = 2dT

Start 2.nd = dT

Start second Start third

Start 2.nd timer = 2dT (int.)

Figure 100 Interrupted start timer

Built in hysteresis

This function operates using two pressure switches:


168 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• The leader will start and stop based on the high pressure switch.

• Thefollowerwill start and stop in correspondencewith thestateof the low pressure switch.

high

pressure

time

low

start stop stop stopstart startleader follower follower follower leader

Figure 101 Built in hysteresis.

By adjusting the pressure switches differently, the twocompressors will function as a pair where one starts before theother.

Two analogue pressures

In two reservoir systems the compressors are started when one thepressure sensors indicate below the start limit. The compressorsare stopped when both of the pressure sensors increase above thestop limit.

pressure

Start leader

start leader

stop leader

Start leaderStop leader

A

B

Figure 102 Two analogue pressures

Overhaul function

Two reservoir system have an overhaul function. That is when oneof the reservoirs is disabled from being part of the auto start andstop logic. There are two ways of setting a reservoir to overhaul:

• Set the pressure sensors belonging to the reservoir to off scan.Thesensor isnot included when checking the auto start and stoplimits for the compressors.

• Set a button in the mimic or physical switch on the equipmentto “out of service”. Different configurations are available asrequired by the customer.


169AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

How to set auto and manual modes

A leader follower compressor system can be set to one of twomodes:

- Auto: For normal leader follower system operation from theRemote Operator Station.

- Manual: The leader follower system can only be operatedlocally from the starter cabinet.

1 Select the mimic display showing the leader followercompressor system.

2 Move the cursor over the leader follower compressorauto/manual square where you want to change mode.

3 Push READ.

- The compressor controller is selected. The text backgroundstarts flashing.

4 Push Auto/man.

- The controller changes between auto and manual. The textbackground changes between green and grey.

* Green - auto

* Grey - manual

How to start a leader follower compressor system

To operate a leader follower compressor system in standby modethe compressor controller and each of the compressors must be setto auto. Then one of the compressors must be started.

Note When thepressure ishigher than thestop limit, the compressorwillnot start.


2 Move the cursor over the auto/manual controller symbol.

3 Push READ.

- The controller is selected.


4 Push Auto/man

- The text background turns green and the text changes toauto.

AUTO

AUTOMAN

MANUAL

AUTOMAN

AUTO


170 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

5 Move the cursor over each of the compressors in the leaderfollower system..

6 Push READ.

- The compressor is selected.- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

7 Push Auto/man.

- The compressor status changes to auto.8 Do this for each of the compressors.

9 When all compressors are set to auto, move the cursor to thecompressor you want to start.

10 Push READ.


11 Push ACTIVATE/START to to start the compressor.

12 Push Auto/man.

- The button status changes to Running, remote CTRL., auto.

How to stop a leader follower compressor system

To take a leader follower pump system out of standby mode, set thecompressor controller to manual and stop the running compressorif required.


2 Move the cursor over the controller symbol

3 Push READ.

- The controller is selected.- The text background starts flashing.

4 Push Auto/man.

- The controller is set to manual.5 If you want to stop the running compressor, move the cursor

over it.

6 Push READ.


AUTOMAN

1

AUTO

AUTOMAN

MANUAL


171AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


- The compressor symbol turns grey.

- The compressor status changes to Ready to start, remoteCTRL., manual.

How to set leader follower priority

A standby compressor system will normally consist of two or threecompressors.


2 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set asleader.

3 Push READ.

- The compressor is selected.

- The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

4 Push Master.

- The text changes to leader.

5 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as thefirst follower.

6 Push READ.



7 Push 1.st standby.

- The text changes to follower.

1 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as thesecond follower.

2 Push READ.



3 Push Next standby.

- The text changes to follower (2).

How to reset compressors

The compressor logic must be reset when the compressor hastripped or as the result of a start failure.

0

MASTER

1.STSTAND

BY

NEXTSTAND

BY


172 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1 Push Alarm ack to acknowledge the alarm.


3 Select the mimic display showing the compressor .

4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the compressor you wantto reset.

5 Push READ.



6 Push RESET.

- The circle around the compressor symbol changes from redto grey.

4.3.4 How to open or close valves

Valve control functions

The following functions and features are available:

• Monitoring of the controlled valve

• Pulse or analogue control of valves with analogue feedback

• Blocking from opening

• Blocking from closing

• Blocking from operation (local control)

• Deviation monitoring

• Update alarm status

• Update event status

• Optional time stamp on every change ofoperation, allowing thesystem to record time of positioning

Valve control types

The valve control can operate the following types ofconfigurations:

On-off valves

• Single acting: One relay for control.

• Singleacting withone feedback:Onerelay forcontrol and onebinary feedback.

• Single acting with two feedbacks: One relay for control andtwo binary feedbacks.

ALARMACK

RESET


173AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Single acting with no feedback: No feedback, only singleacting control.

• Double acting: Two relays for control.

• Double acting with one feedback: Two relays for control andone binary feedback.

• Double acting with two feedbacks: Two relays for control andtwo binary feedbacks.

• Double acting with no feedback: No feedback, only doubleacting control.

Analogue positioning valves• Analogue out: Step-less positioning.

• Analogue out with analogue feedback: Step-less control withanalogue feedback.

• Double acting positioning: Pulsed positioning.

• Double acting with analogue feedback: Pulsed positioningwith analogue valve feedback.

• Double acting with one analogue feedback and two binaryfeedbacks: Pulsed positioning with one analogue valvefeedback and two binary end feedbacks.

MonitoringMonitoring is used when only binary feedbacks are interfaced tothe positioner, and no relay or other control is provided.

• One feedback: No control, one binary feedbacks.

• Two feedbacks: No control, two binary feedbacks.

Valve symbolsDifferent valve symbols are used to indicate different types ofvalves.

Figure 103 Valve symbol.

Figure 104 Three way valve symbol.

Valve symbol coloursValve symbols have colours according to the state they are in.

Single and double acting valves- Green: Open- Grey: Closed- Yellow: Intermediate (opening or closing)- Blue: Blocked- Red: Alarm- White: Local - not ready


174 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Throttle valves

- Green: Feedback at setpoint

- Grey: Closed/stopped

- Yellow: Feedback outside deadband

- Blue: Blocked

- Red: Alarm


Throttle valves have set points between 0 and 100 %.

Note As a default, valves will give an alarm on timeout - when notreaching the end position.

How to open on-off valves

1 Select the mimic display showing the valve.

2 Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want tooperate.

3 Push READ.

- The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected.

- Tag, tag description and the current status of the valve isdisplayed at the bottom left of the display.

4 Push ACTIVATE/START.

- The current status and the new command is displayed.

- The symbol colour changes to green.

How to close on-off valves



3 Push READ.

- The valve is selected. Tag, tag description and the currentstateof thevalve isdisplayed at thebottom left of thedisplay.


4 Push DEACTIVATE/ STOP.

- The current status and new the new command is displayed.

- The symbol colour changes to grey.

How to operate analogue valves


1

0


175AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


3 Push READ.

- The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected.- The text Enter new setpoint (0.0-100.0 %): is displayed.

* 0% - Closed* 100% - Open

4 Type in the new setpoint.

5 Push Enter.

- The valve setpoint is changed.

How to operate throttle valves



3 Push READ.

- The equipment is selected.- The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected.- The following window is displayed:

Figure 105 Menu for analogue valves.

Open valve to 100%

4 To open the valve to 100% use the trackball to point to theopen button and push Read.

- The status changes, first to opening then to opened.

Close valve to 0%

5 To close the valve to 0% use the trackball to point to theclosebutton and push Read.

- The status changes, first to closing then to closed.

Throttle mode

6 To set the setpoint to a value between 0 and 100% use thetrackball to point to the Throttle mode check box and pushRead.

- The menu buttons changes to increase and decrease.


176 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 106 Menu for analogue valves in throttle mode.

7 Move the cursor over the Increase or Decrease button.

8 Push READ.

9 Type in the new setpoint value.

10 Push ENTER.

- The setpoint changes.

How to reset valves

Resetting of valves is required on timeout.


2 Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want toreset.

3 Push READ.

- The valve is selected. Tag, tag description and the currentstatus of the valve is displayed at the bottom left of thedisplay.


4 Push RESET.

- The symbol colour changes to grey.

4.3.5 How to operate a PID controller

PID controller symbol

The PID controller keeps a process signal at a pre-defined value.The controller is used for temperature controlled valves, pressurecontrolled valves, frequency controlled pumps etc.

RESET


177AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Process

Processsetpoint

Process feedback

Valve feedback

Figure 107 PID controller.

The controller can operate in two modes:

* Active (on): This is the normal PID controller mode. Thecontroller operates when active.

* Deactive (off). The PID controller does not control theprocess. If the controller operates on an actuator, manualvalve positioning is possible.

FW COOLING100

0

ACTIVE

62TEMP.

Status

60Setp.

Deg. C Deg. C

28Setp.

32FB

Actuator 0 100%

Alarm statusindicator

PID controllersetpoint

Actuator

Actuator setpoint, used usedwhen control is deactive

Actuator feedback

Actual value

Indicator green when active,grey when deactive

Processsetpoint

Processfeedback

Figure 108 PID controller symbol.

PID controller symbol colours

- Green: Active- Blue: Blocked or configuration fail- Grey: Deactive- Red: Alarm

To select a PID controller

1 Select the mimic display showing the PID controller.


178 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller youwant to operate.

3 Push READ.

- The PID controller is selected. A flashing yellow square isdisplayed around the controller.

- Tag, tag description and the current state of the PIDcontroller is displayed at the bottom left of the display.

ME HFO TEMP200

0

ACTIVE

123TEMP.

Status

120Setp.

Deg. C Deg. C

67Setp.

67Feedb.

Actuator 0 100%

Figure 109 Symbol for an active PID controller.

To activate the controller

1 Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller youwant to operate and push READ.

2 Push ACTIVATE/START.

- The Active circle turns green. The controller setpoint isshown in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both asa percentage and a bargraph. A setpoint command is sent tothe controller.

3 To enter a new setpoint push READ.

- The prompt ACT., DEACT. or EnterNew PROCESS setpointis displayed.

4 Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.

5 Push ENTER.

- The new process setpoint is displayed. The PID controlleradjusts theactuator tomake theprocess feedbackequal to thenew setpoint.

To deactivate the controller

1 Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller youwant to operate and push READ.

1


179AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 Push DEACTIVATE/STOP.

- The Active circle turns grey. The controller setpoint is nolonger displayed, but showing N/A in the Setp. field.Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and abargraph. A setpoint command is sent to the positioner.

3 To enter a new actuator setpoint push READ.

- The prompt ACT., DEACT. or EnterNew PROCESS setpointis displayed.

4 Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.

5 Push ENTER.

- The new actuator setpoint is displayed.

Note You must manually adjust the actuator to make the processfeedback equal to the required value.

ME HFO TEMP200

0

ACTIVE

123TEMP.

Status

N/ASetp.

Deg. C Deg. C

67Setp.

67Feedb.

Actuator 0 100%

Figure 110 Symbol for a PID controller that is not active.

0


180 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

4.4 Local Operator Station

4.4.1 How to operate pumps or fansfrom the Local Operator Station

To operate pumps or fans from the Local Operator Station do thefollowing:

1 The Local Operator Station must be physically connected tothe same CAN segment as the DPU controlling the pump orfan.

2 When connected push MENU UP.

- You should now see the LOS top menu and a list of DPU’sconnected to the CAN segment.

3 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons toselect the DPU controlling the pump or fan. The selectedDPU must be displayed in line two.

4 Push MENU DOWN to select it.

- Observe the DPU Top Menu.

5 Push MENU DOWN to select the Tag Overview Menu.

- Observe the DPU Tag Overview display.

- Channel numbers are indicated on the left side.

- Function tag channels for pumps and fans are organised asfollows:

DPU module Function tag channelsfor starters, valves etc.

RAi-16 33 - 47

RAi-32 33 - 47

RIO-C1 33 - 47

RIO-C2 33 - 47

dPSC 1 - 99

6 Select the function tag channel for the pump or fan you wantto operate using the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWNbuttons.

7 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between TagDescription and Tag Name.


181AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Tagname

Tagstatus

33 AM132S Ready for Start

Channelnumber

8 Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Details Starter display.

- Observe the Tag Details Starter display.

- In this display you can change database parameters for thistag. (Described elsewhere).

- To be able to control pumps or fans the system requires apassword.

9 Push F1 to select the Common Menu.

10 Push SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN to select thePassword parameter.

11 Enter the Password. (Described elsewhere).

12 Push ENTER.

13 If not already selected, push F4 to select the ApplicationMenu.

14 Push and hold MENU DOWN and at the same time push F2.

- Observe the Commands for Starter Menu.

- Available commands for the function tag are displayed.

15 Use the SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN buttons to see allavailable commands.

- The first set of commands are:

* F1 Start LF (low forward, normal start)

* F2 Start HF (high forward)

* F3 Start LR (low reverse)

* F4 Start HR (high reverse)


182 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Commands for Starter DPU 032/01.05.24Start commands : 2 / 12033 AM132S Ready for start|Start LF |Start HF |Start LR |Start HR

Figure 111 Typical control display starter, first set.

- The second set of commands are:

* F1 Stop

* F2 Reset

* F3 Auto

* F4 Semi Auto

Commands for Starter DPU 032/01.05.24Stop & aux commands : 2 / 12033 AM132S Ready for start|Stop |Reset |Auto |Semi Auto

Figure 112 Typical control display starter, second set.

- The meaning of lamp indication for the function keys are:

* Fixed light - function active

* Flashing - function activating

* Dark - not active

16 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between the next andprevious function tag at the same operational level.

17 To exit push MENU UP several times until you reach the TagOverview display.

18 Push F1 to disconnect the DPU.

- The DPU list is displayed.


183AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

4.4.2 How to operate valves from theLocal Operator Station

To operate valves from the Local Operator Station do thefollowing:

1 The Local Operator Station must be physically connected tothe same CAN segment as the DPU controlling the valve.

2 When connected push MENU UP.

- You should now see the LOS top menu and a list of DPU’sconnected to the CAN segment.

3 Use the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN buttons toselect the DPU controlling the valve. The selected DPU mustbe displayed in line two.

4 Push MENU DOWN to select it.

- Observe the DPU Top Menu.

5 Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Overview Menu.

- Observe the DPU Tag Overview display.

- Channel numbers are indicated on the left side.

- Function tag channels for valves are organised as follows:

DPU module Function tag channelsfor starters, valves etc.

RAi-16 33 - 47

RAi-32 33 - 47

RIO-C1 33 - 47

RIO-C2 33 - 47

dPSC 1 - 99

6 Select the function tag channel for the valve you want tooperate using the SELECT UP and SELECT DOWNbuttons.

Tagname

Tagstatus

36 NM 13P Closed AUTO

Channelnumber


184 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between TagDescription and Tag Name.

8 Push MENU DOWN to go to the Tag Details Positionerdisplay.

- Observe the Tag Details Positioner display.

- In this display you can change database parameters for thistag. (Described elsewhere).

- To be able to control valves the system requires a password.

9 Push F1 to select the Common Menu.

10 Push SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN to select thePassword parameter.

11 Enter the Password. (Described elsewhere).

12 Push ENTER.

13 If not already selected push F4 to select the ApplicationMenu.

14 Push and hold MENU DOWN and at the same time push F2.

- Observe the commands for the Positioner Menu.

- Available commands for the function tag are displayed.

15 Use the SELECT UP or SELECT DOWN buttons to see allavailable commands.

- The first set of commands are:

* F1 Open

* F2 Close

* F3 Reset

Commands for Positioner DPU 106/02.11.27Adjust Setpoint 0.036 NM 64P Closed Auto|Open |Close |Reset |

Figure 113 Typical control display for positioner, first set.

- The second set of commands are:

* F1 Thr.Open (throttle open)


185AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

* F2 Thr.Close (throttle close)

* F3 Auto

* F4 Semi Auto

Commands for Positioner DPU 106/02.11.27Not used for analog: 2 / 120 R36 NM 64P Closed Auto|Thr.Open |Thr.Close| Auto |Semi Auto

Figure 114 Typical control display for positioner, second set.

- The meaning of lamp indication for the function keys are:

* Fixed light - function active

* Flashing - function activating

* Dark - not active.

16 Use the ARROW BUTTONS to go between the next andprevious valve function tag at the same operational level.

17 To exit push MENU UP several times until you reach the TagOverview display.

18 Push F1 to disconnect the DPU.

- The DPU list is displayed.


186 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

5 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

5.1 IntroductionThis chapter teaches you how to use the power managementsystem of the DataChiefC20. It is intended for personnel familiarwith the “Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sectionsof this manual. The following subjects are covered:

- About the power management system

- Remote Operator Station process control

- Midi Operator Station process control

Power management system

187AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

5.2 About the power management system

Changeover functionality

Any alarm for the generator set can be configured to have changeover functionality. When any of these alarms are given, a standbydiesel generator starts and connects. The failing generator will thenunload and disconnect. After the generator is disconnected thediesel may continue running, cool down and stop or stop directly,dependent on the configuration.

Automatic start and connect on blackout

When a main switchboard blackout occurs, the 1.st. standby dieselgenerator will start and connect. If it fails to start or connect, thenext standby diesel generator will start and connect. It is possibleto configure the system to start more than one standby generatoron blackout.

Load dependent start and stop of standbygenerators

When a high load occurs on on the connected generator(s), the 1.ststandby generator will start and connect. When the load decreasesenough to let a generator disconnect without overloading theremaining, the 1.st to stop generator will disconnect and stop.

Control of heavy consumers start request andstart granted

When a heavy consumer start request is received, the powermanagement system will check for available power.

* If enough power is available and a predefined number ofgenerators are connected, the power management systemgives a “start granted” to the consumer.

* If enough power is not available, the standby generator(s)will automatically start and connect. When enough poweris available, a “start granted” is given to the consumer.

* When more than one heavy consumer sends a “request forstart”, only one is granted at a time. The powermanagement system remembers all start requests andenables them in sequence.


188 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


5.3.1 OverviewThe power management system is mainly operated through amimic picture reflecting the ships power distribution system. Thesystem can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine,steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls havedifferent configurations dependent on the type of generator drive.A typical mimic picture is shown below:

Figure 115 Typical power management system mimic picture.

5.3.2 How to operate a generator setwith start/stop control

Generator set symbol colour interpretation

A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seenbelow) is called a generator set. The following information iscontained in the colours used for the generator set.


189AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Prime mover symbolRed dot: Prime mover alarmGray: StoppedGrey and yellow: StartingGreen: Running

Green and yellow: Stopping

Generator symbolRed dot: Generator alarmGray: Stopped

Green: Running, ready to connect

Circuit braker symbolRed dot: Circuit breaker alarmIn disconnected position:Gray: OpenYellow: Syncronizing/connectingIn connected position:Green: ConnectedYellow: Disconnecting

Generator set information box

Each generator set has an information box containing thefollowing information:

Mode: Local/semi-auto/auto.Operational state of the generator set.Standby status information, priority in brackets.Low load auto stop blocked.Fuel selection/load control selection.

Figure 116 Generator set information box.

To display the control dialog

1 Select the the power management mimic picture.

2 Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.

3 Push the READ button.

- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate thegenerator set. This dialog will vary according to how thegenerator set is configured. The following is a maximumconfiguration:


190 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Push to connect the generator.

Push to disconnect the generator.Push to stop the generator.

Push to turn off load dependent stop function.

Push to set the generator to semi-auto mode.

Push to give the generator lower priority.

Push to select diesel oil only.

Push to start the generator.

Push to turn on load dependent stop function.

Push to give the generator higher priority.

Push to set the generator to auto mode.

Push to select frequency and load control by governor.

Push to reset alarm messages.

Push to select heavy fuel/diesel oil change over logic.

Push to select frequency and load control by DataChie

Figure 117 Control dialog for generator set with start/stop.

Semi Auto mode

In semi auto mode the operator controls the generator set using thebuttons in the dialog to start or stop, connect or disconnect itaccording to the load condition.

Note For Semi Auto mode the following applies:

* A generator set must be started before it can be connected.

* A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator butthe diesel will remain running.

* The generator set will not be part of the standby system.

To start a generator

1 Push Start.

- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This meansit is starting.

- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means thatit is running idle.

- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it isrunning nominal and ready to connect.

To connect a generator

This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominalspeed.

1 Push Connect.

- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is synchronizing.

- The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turnsgreen. This means that the generator is connected.


191AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

To disconnect a generator1 Push Disconnect.

- The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that thegenerator is unloading.

- The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turnsgrey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

To stop a generatorThis is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected.

1 Push Stop.

- The text cooling down is displayed. This means that thegenerator set is cooling down. After cool down time out theprime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means thatthe prime mover is stopping.

- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that theprime mover has stopped.

2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without coolingdown, push Stop twice.

Auto modeIn auto mode the generator is automatically started and stoppedaccording to the load condition and the priority setting.

Note For Auto mode the following applies:

* A disconnect command will cause the followingsequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool down and stop.

* A stop command will cause the following sequence:Unloading, disconnect and direct stop.

* A connect command will cause the following sequence:Starting, synchronizing and connect.

* A start command will cause a starting sequence only.


This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and readyfor start.

1 Push Connect.







192 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

To disconnect a generator

1 Push Disconnect.






To stop a generator

When the circuit breaker is connected:

1 Push Stop.



- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that theprime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop withoutcooling down period.

When the circuit breaker is disconnected:

1 Push Stop.



2 To stop the prime mover immediately push Stop twice.


1 Push Start.





193AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Stop block On/Off

1 Push On to block the load dependent stop function.

- This means that the generator will not stop when there is alow load on the main switchboard.

2 Push Off to activate the load dependent stop function.

- This means that the generator will stop when there is a lowload on the main switchboard.

Pri. Higher/Lower

The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stoplast. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last andstop first.

1 Push Pri. Higher to give the generator set a higher standbypriority. The indicated standby number is lowered by one.

2 Push Pri. Lower to give the generator set a lower standbypriority.The indicated standby number is increased by one.

HFO - Heavy Fuel Oil

1 Push HFO to activate the heavy fuel oil change over logic.

- The heavy fuel oil change over logic will start and stop theprime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fueloil during loaded condition.

DO - Diesel Oil

1 Push DO to run the prime mover on diesel oil only.

- The heavy fuel oil change over logic is not in use.

Droop

1 Push Droop to select frequency and load control by theDataChief C20, based on diesel engine speed governordroop curve (static).

Isochron - Isochroneous

1 Push Isochron to select frequency and load control by thediesel engine speed governor.

Reset

1 Push Reset to reset any alarm messages.

- Before resetting any alarm rectify the the problem, if any!

5.3.3 How to operate a generator setwithout start/stop control

Applicable for shaft generators.


194 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


1 Select the power management mimic picture.



- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate thegenerator set.

- The following illustration shows what each of the buttons areused for:


Push to disconnect the generator.


Figure 118 Control dialog for generator set without start/stop.

Connect

1 Push Connect.


- When the shaft generator is syncronizing, the dieselgenerators connected to the bus bar will regulate thefrequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator.


Disconnect

1 Push Disconnect.


- When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generatorsconnected to the same bus bar will increase their power totake the load off the shaft generator.


Reset



5.3.4 How to operate a generator setwithout start, stop with adjustableload setpoint

Applicable for steam turbine generators.


195AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003





- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate thegenerator set.



Push to disconnect the generator.


Push to activate the new load setpoint value.

Insert the load setpoint value here.

Figure 119 Control dialog for generator set without start/stopwith adjustable load setpoint.

Connect

1 Push Connect.



Disconnect

1 Push Disconnect.



Load setp. - load setpoint

1 Move the cursor to the load setpoint text box.

2 Push the READ button to select it.

3 Type in the new load setpoint.

4 Push OK.

- The generator will change the load according to the newsetpoint.

Reset




196 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

5.3.5 How to operate the mainswitchboard controller

Main switchboard controller symbols

The main switchboard is available with two different layoutsdependent on the system configuration. The following informationis provided:

Amount of power generated.

Status: Local/semi-auto/auto.Low load autostop blocked.

Voltage of generated power.Frequency of generated power.

Operational state, red text indicatesan alarm condition.

Symmetric/asymmetric loadsharing mode.

Available (spare) power.

Figure 120 Main switchboard controller alternative 1.

Available (spare) power.Operational state, red text indicates analarm condition.

Figure 121 Main switchboard controller alternative 2.



2 Move the cursor to the main switchboard.


- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the themain switchboard.



197AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Push to select asymmetric load sharing.Push to set the main switchboard controller to semi-auto mode.


Push to set the main switchboard controller to automode.

Push to select symmetric load sharing.

Figure 122 Control dialog for the main switchboard.

Auto

1 Push Auto to set the main switchboard controller in automode. The standby and blackout recovery functions are inoperation.

- When the load increases above an adjustable limit thestandby generator with the highest priority starts.

- When the load decreases below an adjustable limit thestandby generator with the lowest priority number stops.

- At a blackout the standby generator with the highest prioritystarts.

- At a failure on a connected generator the generator with thehighest priority starts. A changeover takes place.

SemiAuto

Note Used for commissioning purposes, do not use for normaloperation! Selecting SemiAuto will cause a Non Standby alarm.

1 Push SemiAuto to set the main switchboard controller inSemiAuto mode. This will deactivate all logic mentionedunder Auto above.

Sym - Symmetric

1 Push Sym for symmetric load sharing between thegenerators.

- The load is shared equally between the generators.

Asym - Asymmetric

1 Push Asym for asymmetric load sharing between twoconnected generators. When more than two generators areconnected the asymmetric load sharing is switched ofautomatically and will use symmetric load sharing.

- The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following:

* Run one of the two generators close to the low limit of20%.


198 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

* Run one of the two generators close to the high load limitof about 80%.

* After an adjustable period of time the two generators willswap load setpoints.

Reset

1 Push to reset the main switchboard controller when in stateOperation Blocked, Remote Control.

5.3.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker


The control dialog is project specific and may vary from theillustration below.


2 Move the cursor to the bus tie breaker.


- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the thebus tie breaker is displayed.

Connect

1 Push Connect.

- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that thebus tie breaker is closed.

Disconnect

1 Push Disconnect.

- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that thebus tie breaker is open.

Reset



5.3.7 How to operate the one touch autosequence

One touch auto sequencing allows you to set the main switchboardto a set of predefined configurations by pushing a button.

One touch auto sequence controller symbol

To simplify power management one touch auto sequencing allowsyou to set the main switchboard to a set of predefinedconfigurations by pushing a button. Typical main switchboardconfigurations are:


199AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

* DG-mode (diesel generator mode)

* Manoeuvre mode

* PTO-mode (shaft generator mode)

* PTI-mode (electric propulsion mode)

Figure 123 One touch auto sequence symbol, indicatingcurrent state of operation.


The control dialog is project specific and may vary from theillustration below.


2 Move the cursor over the one touch auto sequence symbol.


- A new dialog appears containing buttons to operate the theone touch auto sequence.


Push to abort theselected sequence.

Push a modebutton to activate it.

Push to reset.

Figure 124 One touch auto sequence dialog box.

To select modes

1 Push the button for the desired mode.

- The system automatically makes the necessary actions to setthe main switchboard to this mode.


200 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

5.4 Midi Operator Station

5.4.1 OverviewThe power management system is mainly operated through amimic picture reflecting the ships power distribution system. Thesystem can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine,steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls havedifferent configurations dependent on the type of generator drive.A typical mimic picture is shown below.

Figure 125 Typical power management system mimic picture.

5.4.2 How to operate the mainswitchboard controller

To display the control picture


2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to select one of theswitchboards.

3 Push Enter.

- A new picture showing the switchboard and text for thefunction keys appear.

ENTER


201AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 126 Typical main switchboard controller.

4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display allavailable functions for the function keys.

- The number of functions will vary according to how theswitchboard is configured.

5 Push the function key for the desired function.

- The following functions are available:* Symmetric* Asymmetric* Connect more power* Disconnect surplus power* Stop block on* Stop block off* Reset* Auto* Semi-auto

Symmetric

1 Push the function key for Symmetric for symmetric loadsharing between the generators.

- The load is shared equally between the generators.

Asymmetric

1 Push the function key for Asymmetric for asymmetric loadsharing between two connected generators. When more thantwo generators are connected the asymmetric load sharing isswitched of automatically and will use symmetric loadsharing.

- The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following:

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4


202 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

* Run one of the two generators close to the low limit of20%.

* Run one of the two generators close to the high load limitof about 80%.

* After an adjustable period of time the two generators willswap load setpoints.

Reset

1 Push the function key for to reset the main switchboardcontroller when in state Operation Blocked, RemoteControl.

Auto

1 Push the function key for Auto to set the main switchboardcontroller in auto mode. The standby and blackout recoveryfunctions are in operation.

- When the load increases above an adjustable limit thestandby generator with the highest priority starts.

- When the load decreases below an adjustable limit thestandby generator with the lowest priority number stops.

- At a blackout the standby generator with the highest prioritystarts.

- At a failure on a connected generator the generator with thehighest priority starts. A changeover takes place.

SemiAuto

Note Used for commissioning purposes, do not use for normaloperation! Selecting SemiAuto will cause a Non Standby alarm.

1 Push the function key for SemiAuto to set the mainswitchboard controller in SemiAuto mode. This willdeactivate all logic mentioned under Auto above.

5.4.3 How to operate a generator setwith start/stop control

Generator set symbol colour interpretation

A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seenbelow) is called a generator set. The following information iscontained in the colours used for the generator set.

F1 - F4

F1 - F4


203AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Prime mover symbolRed dot: Prime mover alarmGray: StoppedGrey and yellow: StartingGreen: Running

Green and yellow: Stopping

Generator symbolRed dot: Generator alarmGray: Stopped

Green: Running, ready to connect

Circuit braker symbolRed dot: Circuit breaker alarmIn disconnected position:Gray: OpenYellow: Syncronizing/connectingIn connected position:Green: ConnectedYellow: Disconnecting



2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to the generator setyou want to control.

3 Push Enter.

- A new picture showing this generator set and text for thefunction keys appear.


- The number of functions will vary according to how thegenerator set is configured.


- The following functions are available:

* Connect

* Disconnect

* Reset

* Start

* Stop

* Auto

* Semi-auto

ENTER

F1 - F4


204 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

* Stop block on

* Stop block off

* Pri. higher

* Pri. lower

* Switch genset

Figure 127 Generator set with start stop control.

To display detailed information

The following detailed information displays are available:

* Generator frequency

* Generator voltage

* Generator current

* Generator load

* Generator relative load

1 Select a generator set as described above.

2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to the informationyou want to display.

Figure 128 Use the navigator to go between these selections.

3 Push Enter.

- A new picture showing the detail display is shown. Thefollowing is a detail display for frequency.

ENTER


205AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 129 Frequency display.

4 Push Enter again to display a tag details view for this tag.

- A new picture showing the tag details view is shown. Thefollowing is a tag details view for a frequency tag.

Figure 130 Tag details view for a frequency tag.

5 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display allavailable information.

Semi Auto mode

In semi auto mode the operator controls the generator set using thefunction keys to start or stop, connect or disconnect it according tothe load condition.

Note For Semi Auto mode the following applies:

* A generator set must be started before it can be connected.

* A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator butthe diesel will remain running.

* The generator set will not be part of the standby system.


206 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


1 Push the function key for Start.





This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominalspeed.

1 Push the function key for Connect.




1 Push the function key for Disconnect.



To stop a generator

This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected.

1 Push the function key for Stop.



F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4


207AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

2 To stop the prime mover immediately, without coolingdown, push the function key for Stop twice.

Auto mode

In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stoppedaccording to the load condition and the priority setting.

Note For Auto mode the following applies:

* A disconnect command will cause the followingsequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool down and stop.

* A stop command will cause the following sequence:Unloading, disconnect and direct stop.

* A connect command will cause the following sequence:Starting, synchronizing and connect.

* A start command will cause a starting sequence only.


This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and readyfor start.













F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4


208 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


To stop a generatorWhen the circuit breaker is connected:




- The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that theprime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop withoutcooling down period.

When the circuit breaker is disconnected:




2 To stop the prime mover immediately push Stop twice.


1 Push the function key for Start.- The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means

it is starting.- Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that

it is running idle.- Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is

running nominal and ready to connect.

Stop block On/Off

1 Push the function key for Stop block on to block the loaddependent stop function.

- This means that the generator will not stop when there is alow load on the main switchboard.

2 Push the function key for Stop block off to activate the loaddependent stop function.

- This means that the generator will stop when there is a lowload on the main switchboard.

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4


209AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Pri. Higher/Lower

The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stoplast. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last andstop first.

1 Push the function key for Pri. Higher to give the generatorset a higher standby priority. The indicated standby numberis lowered by one.

2 Push the function key for Pri. Lower to give the generatorset a lower standby priority. The indicated standby numberis increased by one.

HFO - Heavy Fuel Oil

1 Push the function key for HFO to activate the heavy fuel oilchange over logic.

- The heavy fuel oil change over logic will start and stop theprime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fueloil during loaded condition.

DO - Diesel Oil

1 Push the function key for DO to run the prime mover ondiesel oil only.

- The heavy fuel oil change over logic is not in use.

Droop

1 Push the function key for Droop to select frequency and loadcontrol by the DataChiefC20, based on diesel engine speedgovernor droop curve (static).

Isochron - Isochroneous

1 Push the function key for Isochron to select frequency andload control by the diesel engine speed governor.

Reset

1 Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages.


5.4.4 How to operate a generator setwithout start/stop control

Applicable for shaft generators.

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4


210 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003




3 Push Enter.






* Connect

* Disconnect

* Reset

Figure 131 Generator set without start/stop.

Connect



- When the shaft generator is synchronizing, the dieselgenerators connected to the bus bar will regulate thefrequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator.


ENTER

F1 - F4

F1 - F4


211AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Disconnect



- When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generatorsconnected to the same bus bar will increase their power totake the load off the shaft generator.


Reset



5.4.5 How to operate a generator setwithout start, stop with adjustableload setpoint

Applicable for steam turbine generators.


1 Select the power management mimic picture.


3 Push Enter.






* Connect

* Disconnect

* Load setp.

* Reset

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

ENTER

F1 - F4


212 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Connect




Disconnect




Reset



5.4.6 How to operate a bus tie breaker


The control picture is project specific and may vary from theillustration below.


2 Using the navigator key move the cursor to the bust tiebreaker you want to control.

3 Push Enter.

- A new picture showing the bus tie breaker is shown.

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

ENTER


213AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 132 Typical bus tie breaker symbol.


5 Push the function key for the desired mode.

- The system automatically makes the necessary actions to setthe main switchboard to this mode.

Connect


- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that thebus tie breaker is closed.

Disconnect


- The bus tie breaker symbol turns grey. This means that thebus tie breaker is open.

Reset



F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4

F1 - F4


214 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6 REFERENCE GUIDE

6.1 IntroductionThis document gives an overview of parameters that can beinspected and adjusted from a Local or Remote Operator Station.Where applicable other details of the parameters’ are included.


- Tage type overview

- Alarm and monitoring parameters

- Engineers safety

Reference guide

215AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6.2 Tag type overviewThe following is a list of available tag types in the DataChiefC20Alarm and monitoring system with process control and powermanagement.

A tag type defines the software used to read a channel on aDistributed Processing Unit. A channel is where a signalconnected to a Distributed Processing Unit. The tag type defineswitch application to run on the signal.

Example: If channel no. 2 in a Remote Analogue Input module(RAi-16) is tag type 20, the input signal is 4- 20 mA.

6.2.1 Basic tag typesTag type number Channel type

0 Undefined type

1 Voltage +-- 0.1

2 Voltage +-- 1

3 Voltage +-- 5

4 Voltage +-- 10

6 Voltage 0 -- 1

7 Voltage 0 -- 1

8 Voltage 0 -- 5

9 Voltage 0 -- 10

11 Milli amps +-- 1

12 Milli amps +-- 5

13 Milli amps +-- 10

14 Milli amps +-- 20

16 Milli amps 0 -- 1





22 PT 50

23 PT 100

24 PT 1000

26 Potmeter 1 K

27 Potmeter 5 K

29 On--off without check (RAi--16)

30 On--off single check (RAi--16)

31 On--off double check (RAi--16)

32 RDi--32 digital input


216 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Channel typeTag type number

34 Counter event

35 Counter frequency

36 Counter time

38 TC element

40 AC voltage 10 bit

41 AC current 10 bit

43 Generator frequency

44 Bus freq.

45 Phase difference

46 Cosine phi

47 Phase velocity

49 Pick up

128 Exhaust mean

129 Exhaust deviation

130 Rio PLC type

131 DO 401 client

132 DOT (dig. out) handler

133 AO (an. out) 401 client

134 AO (analogue out) handler

135 Exhaust deviation limit

136 Alarm relay

137 Local alarm system

138 LOS 401 client

141 Rotating light handler

142 ASCII IO handler

143 SSC IO handler

144 DS 401 handler

200 Serial AI

201 Serial DI

255 System tag handler

150 Dead man handler

Exhaust tag types are: 128, 129 and 135.

6.2.2 Analogue out tagsTag type and Distributed Processing Unit type defines theanalogue output channel type. If the Distributed Processing Unittype is Remote Analogue Output module, the following analogueoutput channel types are available:Channel type number Channel type

0 0 -- 10.0 Volt

1 +-- 10.0 Volt

Reference guide

217AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Channel typeChannel type number

2 0 -- 5.0 Volt

3 +-- 5.0 Volt

4 0 -- 20.0 mA

5 4 -- 20.0 mA

6.2.3 RelaysBinary out is defined as a channel in a Remote Digital Outputmodule. All channels in a Remote Digital Output module areautomatically an output channel type.

6.3 Alarm and monitoring parameters

6.3.1 Analogue input tag itemsParameterName

Type Adjust--able

Function

Enable Grad.Alarm

Yes/no Yes Enable/disable aAlarm

Enable AlarmLow

Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm

Enable AlarmLow Low


Enable AlarmHigh


Enable AlarmHigh High


Enable EventLow

Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event

Enable EventLow Low


Enable EventHigh


Enable EventHigh High


Gradient BlockLimit

Number Yes Block if measured value is< block limit

Gradient Limit Number Yes Gradient alarm limit

Limit Alarm LowLow

Number Yes Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low Number Yes Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High Number Yes Alarm limit

Limit Alarm HighHigh


Limit Event LowLow



218 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

FunctionAdjust--able

TypeParameterName

Limit Event Low Number Yes Event limit

Limit Event High Number Yes Event limit

Limit Event HighHigh


Filter Time Number Yes Time in 100 milliseconds

Dynamic DeadBand

Number Yes Report value dead bandlimit

Counts Low Number Yes A/D minimum value

Counts High Number Yes A/D maximum value

Eng.Units Low Number Yes Instrument minimum value

Eng.Units High Number Yes Instruments maximumvalue

Raw Value Number No Measured raw value di-rectly from ADC

Raw PercentValue

Number No Measured raw value n %of range

Scaled Value Number No Measured value scaled totechnical value

Filtered Value Number No Filtered scaled value

Some of the parameters are further explained below.

Enable alarms and events

Alarms may be enabled or disabled by altering the value of theenable parameters. Select YES for enable, NO for disable.

Gradient parameters

The gradient calculation uses the filtered value as input. In orderto make the gradient more robust against noise, it is calculatedbased on a moving average over the three last samples of thefiltered value. When the process value falls below the Block limitthe gradient alarm will be blocked. Above this process value, thegradient alarm is activated if the calculated gradient value exceedsthe Gradient Limit.

• Block limit: A process value below this limit inhibits thegradient alarm.

• Gradient Limit: The gradient alarm is activated if the gradientvalue in [units/sec] exceeds this limit.

6.3.2 Alarm and event limitsAlarm and event limits are entered in technical units. Each alarm& event limit has it’s own enable flag. If the enable flag is set, thealarm/event status will be updated. If the enable flag is not set thecorresponding status is cleared.

Reference guide

219AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

The filtered process value is compared with four alarm and fourevent limits. The alarm and event status is updated as follows (ifthe enable flag is set):

1 LL= on, if Filtered_value < alarm_LL limit.

2 L = on, if Filtered_value < alarm_L limit.

3 H = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_H limit.

4 HH = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_HH limit.

5 Ev_1 = on, if Filtered_value > event_1 limit.




The LL, L, H and HH alarms are activated as soon as the alarmdelays has expired.

6.3.3 Filter time

The filter function is a 2nd order Butterworth filter. The scaledprocess value is filtered with a user defined filter time constant,which defines thecut-off frequency for the filter.The timeconstantresolution is 0.1 seconds. A time constant = 0 disables the filter,hence the lowest cut-off frequency is 10 Hz with the time constantset to 0.1 seconds.

6.3.4 Dynamic deadband

The dynamic dead band is entered in engineering units with thesame number of decimals as specified for the process value. Thedynamic dead band parameter is only in use if the external tagparameter is set to YES.This parameter is used for dynamicupdateof the process value for external tag users. When the process valuebecomes greater/less than the last sent value with more than thedynamic dead-band, a new value is sent.

6.3.5 Scaling parameters

The scaling parameters are given in corresponding pairs oftechnical values and measured values read from the analogue todigital converter.

The technical sensor range is: Eng.Units High – Eng.Units Low.

The instrument range is: Counts High – Counts Low.


220 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Counts High

Counts Low

EU HighEng.value

EU Low

ADCInput

Figure 133 Scaling parameters.

Measured values

Each channel is sampled froma16 bit analogue to digital converterevery 10 milliseconds. The result of this sampling is a value in therange 0 – 65535 Counts. Depending on the type of signalconnected, the legal count range may be less. The table belowshows the count range for the different signal types available:Code Short Text Counts High Counts Low

1 VOLT_PM_01 45874 19660

2 VOLT_PM_1 45874 19660

3 VOLT_PM_5 45874 19660

4 VOLT_PM_10 58981 6553

6 VOLT_0_01 45874 32767

7 VOLT_0_1 45874 32767

8 VOLT_0_5 45874 32767

9 VOLT_0_10 58981 32767

11 MA_PM_1 58981 6553

12 MA_PM_5 39321 26214

13 MA_PM_10 45874 19660

14 MA_PM_20 58981 6553

16 MA_0_1 58981 32767

17 MA_0_5 39321 32767

18 MA_0_10 45874 32767

19 MA_0_20 58981 32767

20 MA_4_20 58981 38010

22 PT_50 1) 1)

23 PT_100 1) 1)

24 PT_1000 1) 1)

26 POT_1K 2) 2)

27 POT_5K 2) 2)

Reference guide

221AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1 The RTD elements are automatically calculated based oninterpolation with values fetched from a predefined table.The scaling parameters are therefore not adjustable.

2 The potentiometer signal types are automatically calculatedbased on a conversion algorithm. The counts scalingparameters is therefore not adjustable.

The Raw Value for a channel is the result of the sampling of theanalogue to digital converter. By using the scaling parameters theScaled Value is calculated, and from this value the raw percentvalue is calculated ( ± 100.00). The Scaled Value is used as inputto the 2 nd order butterworth filter to produce the Filtered Value.

6.3.6 Counter input tag itemsParameter Name Type Adjust--

ableFunction

Enable Alarm Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disablealarm

Enable Alarm LowLow

Yes/no Yes Enable/disablealarm

Enable Alarm High Yes/no Yes Enable/disablealarm

Enable Alarm HighHigh


Enable Event Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disableevent

Enable Event LowLow

Yes/no Yes Enable/disableevent

Enable Event High Yes/no Yes Enable/disableevent

Enable Event HighHigh


Limit Alarm Low Low Number Yes Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low Number Yes Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High Number Yes Alarm limit

Limit Alarm HighHigh


Limit Event Low Low Number Yes Event limit

Limit Event Low Number Yes Event limit

Limit Event High Number Yes Event limit

Limit Event HighHigh


Filter time Number Yes Time in 100 millisec-onds

Filter index Number Yes Counter input pin fil-ter


222 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


TypeParameter Name

Time base Number Yes Counting time code:ms=0:s=1:min=2:hr=3

Pulses per Eng.Unit Number Yes Pulses per engi-neering unit.

Raw value Number No Measured raw valuedirectly from counter

Scaled value Number No Measured valuescaled to technicalvalue

Filtered value Number No Filtered scaledvalue

Dynamic dead band Number No

Parameters specific to counter inputs are described below.

Counter input parameters

Filter Index

When using the counter as an event counter it is possible to filterthecounter input signalwith adigital filter in orderto avoidcontactnoise to be counted. The Filter Index parameter specifies thedigital filter cut-off frequency according to the table below.Filter Index Cut--off frequency

0 1 HZ

1 5 HZ

2 10 HZ

3 50 HZ

4 100 HZ

5 500 HZ

6 1667 HZ

Time Base

When using the counter for frequency or time measurements theTime base parameter specifies in which time unit themeasurement shall be calculated. The following values areavailable:Time Base Time unit

0 Milliseconds

1 Seconds

2 Minutes

3 Hours

Note Time base = 0 is not available when using the counter in frequencymode.

Reference guide

223AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Pulses per Eng.Unit

When using the counter in frequency measurement mode thescaling algorithm need to know the number of pulses generated bythe counting sensor per engineering unit. This is specified in thePulses pr. Eng Unit parameter.

Pulses per engineering unit is for instance:

• 10 pulses per liter (flow rate).

• 120 pulses per revolution (engine RPM).

• 100 of pulses per knot (ship speed).

Counter input measured values

Raw Value

This value is read directly from the counter. In event countingmode this value is the same as the scaled value.

Scaled Value

In event counting mode the scaled value is the same as the rawvalue. In frequency, counting mode the scaled value is calculatedfrom the raw value by using the Pulses pr. Eng Unit and the timebase parameters. In time mode, only the Time base parameter isused to calculate the Scaled value.

Filtered Value

The Scaled Value is used as input to the 2nd order butterworth filterto produce the Filtered Value.

6.3.7 Digital input tag itemsParameter Name Type Adjust--

ableFunction

On delay Number Yes Delay in 100 millisec-onds

Off delay Number Yes Delay in 100 millisec-onds

Enable Alarm Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm

Enable Alarm High Yes/no Yes Enable/disable alarm

Enable Event Low Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event

Enable Event High Yes/no Yes Enable/disable event

Invert Yes/no Yes Invert input status

Input value Number No Input status before timedelay

Delayed input Number No Input status after timedelay

Only the parameters specific to digital inputs are described below.


224 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Digital input parameters

DelaysDigital input status is delayed to remove rapid irrelevanttransitions. The delay time specifies how long time the signal mustbe stable before the new input value is accepted. The delay time isspecified in units of 100 milliseconds. The value 20 means a delayof 2 seconds.

InvertThe inputvaluecan beused directly or inverted beforeuse.SpecifyYES to invert the input signal.

Input ValuesInput status both before and after time delay is available.

6.3.8 Exhaust mean value tag itemsParameter Name Type Adjust--

ableFunction

Mean temperaturehigh high


Enable alarm high Yes/no Yes Alarm enable/dis-able

Enable alarm highhigh

Yes/no Yes Alarm enable/dis-able

Mean temperaturehigh


Mean temperatureblock

Number Yes Alarm blocking limit

Dev. temperaturehigh


Dev. temperaturelow


Cylinder 1 temp Number Yes Temperature tag-number ref.








Reference guide

225AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


TypeParameter Name









Dynamic alarm lim-it

Number No Deviation alarm limit

Mean Temp Number No Calculated meantemp

Exhaust mean value parameters

Mean Temp High High/Enable alarm High High

If the mean temperature high high enable is set to YES, the meantemperature high high alarm is activated if the calculated meantemperature increases above the mean temperature High highlimit.

Mean Temp High

The mean temperature high alarm is activated if the calculatedmean temperature increases above the mean temperature highlimit.

Dynamic deviation alarm limit

Alarm limit at current mean temperature.


226 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Mean Temp block/Dev. Temp. high/Dev. Temp. Low

If the mean temperature falls below the mean temperature blocklimit, all deviation alarms are inhibited. The Dev. Temp. low limitdefines the maximum allowed deviation from the meantemperature for each cylinder when the mean temperature is equalto the mean temperature block limit. The Dev. Temp high limitdefines the maximum allowed deviation from the meantemperature for each cylinder when the mean temperature is equalto the mean temperature high alarm limit. The actual deviationalarm limit is a dynamical calculated alarm limit that each cylinderuses for deviation alarm detection. The figure below gives agraphical illustration of the different parameters.

100 200 300 400 500 600 _C

100

200

300

400

500

600

_C

dtL : Cylinder Exh. tempDeviation low limitat Mean temp lowlimit

mtH : Mean temp.high alarm limt

dtH : Cylinder Exh. tempDeviation highlimit at Mean temphigh limit

mtB : Mean temp. alarmblocking limtAlarms are Inhibited

in this area

Cylinder ExhaustTemperature

Engine MeanTemperature

AlarmZone

AlarmZone

Figure 134 Exhaust mean valueparameters.

Cylinder 1 – 16 temperature

The cylinder (1 – 16) temperature parameters are tag numberreferences for each cylinder’s temperature measurement. Only thecylinder references that are in use areused forcalculating themeantemperature.

Reference guide

227AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Mean temperature

The mean temperature is calculated as an average of all thecylinders specified in the cylinder temperature referenceparameters. Cylinder temperatures that are in instrument fail arenot used in the calculation.

6.3.9 Exhaust deviation tag itemsParametername

Type Adjust--able

Function

Correction temp Number Yes Correction temp

Cylinder tem-perature ref.

Number Yes This temperature tag-number ref.

Normalizedtemp

Number No Measured temperature+ temperature correc-tion

There has to be one exhaust deviation tag item for each cylinder.This tag item checks the normalised cylinder temperature againstthe deviation alarm limit calculated by the exhaust meantemperature tag item and activates the exhaust deviation alarm ifthe normalised temperature is outside the legal deviation range.

Exhaust deviation parameters

Correction temperature

Each cylinder’s correction temperature is calculated only onrequest from the operator. This is normally done when the engineis running in steady state at 100% load. The reason for using acorrection temperature is that all cylinders have their own normaloperating temperatures, which mostly are not equal to the enginemean temperature. By Adding the correction temperature to thereal cylinder temperature, the cylinder temperature is normalisedso that the deviation alarm limits are valid for all cylinders. Thecorrection temperature is calculated in the following way:

Correction_temperature = Meantemp -RealCylindertemp

Cylinder temperature reference

The cylinder temperature ref. parameter is a tag number referenceto the cylinders temperature.

Normalised Temp

The Normalised temperature is calculated in the following way:Cylinder_normalised_temp = RealCylindertemp +Correction_temp

This normalised cylinder temperature is again used for checkingagainst the deviation limits to generate the deviation alarm.


228 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6.3.10 Common submenu itemsParameterName

Type Adjust--able

Function

Tag type Number Yes RIO channel type

Decimal point Number Yes Fixed point location for taganaloge value

External tag Yes/no No Yes if tag is used by someother tag

Tag name Text No Tag’s global name

Common submenu parameters

Tag type

The channel type is a code specifying how the input signal ishandled and scaled. There are 255 different codes available.

Decimal point

Technical process values are represented as a fixed-point value.The number 234.23 is internally represented with a value of 23423and a decimal point of 2. Note that control applications mostlyhave decimal point 1.

Tag names

The External Tag parameter = YES means that this tag is used byanother module. Most control applications are externals. The tagsvalue will be automatically transmitted for external use. The TagName parameter is the global tag name. These parameters can notbe changed from a Local Operator Station.

6.3.11 Alarm submenu itemsParameterName

Type Adjust--able

Function

Alarm on delay1 Number Yes High/ low delay on (1second)

Alarm off delay1 Number Yes High/ low delay off (1second)

Alarm on delay2 Number Yes HighHigh/lowlow delayon (1 second)

Alarm off delay2 Number Yes Highhigh/lowlow delayoff (1 second)

Inhibit on delay Number Yes Inhibit delay on (1 sec-ond)

Inhibit off delay Number Yes Inhibit delay off (1 sec-ond)

Inhibit tag Number Yes Tagnumber to inhibitthis channel

Reference guide

229AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Alarm and inhibit deleays

There are separate parameters for alarm delay on and off, as wellas delay of inhibit on and off. When the conditions for alarm orinhibit is changed, a timer is started. The new condition must bestable for the time specified by the delay parameter before the newalarm condition is accepted and an event is issued. Delays arespecified in seconds.

Inhibit parameters

Tag Number

Specifies the tag number to check status for. The specified tagnumber’s external parameter must be set to activate the ProcessData Object (PDO) transmission on changes.

6.4 Engineers safetyThe engineers safety (dead man) system is a system for engineerfitness. When activated, the reset button must be pressed by theengineer within predefined time period, if not, the system willindicate ”Engineer fitness alarm”.

6.4.1 Functions

• Start, stop and reset from pushbuttons.

• Control from the Remote Operator Station.

• Warning light activated by relay.

• Alarm horn activated by relay.

• Range check of timers according to IMO rules.

When active, the system will activate a rotating light after expiredtime delay. The engineer must now reset the system. If the systemis not reset within a new time period, the system will activate analarm. Reset can be pressed at any time. The system will typicallybe activated from the Remote Operator Station by selected alarmswhen running an unattended engine room.

6.4.2 Local control

The system is activated and de-activated manually by akey-switch. The system can also be activated automatically fromthe alarm system when an engine room alarm occurs duringunattended engine room. A number of reset push buttons arelocated around the ship.


230 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6.4.3 Remote Operator Station controlWhen an alarm occur in bridge watch, the engineer safety handleris activated. The timers are reset every time activated. The timersare not reset by the command from Remote Operator Station, ifalready running.

6.4.4 ParametersParametername

Type Adj. Function Initialvalue

Par.ref.

Tag1: Start Number Yes Start/on digital inputTag reference

Tag1

Tag2: Stop Number Yes Stop/off digital inputTag reference

Tag2

Tag3: Re-set

Number Yes Reset digital input Tagreference

Tag3

Tag4: OnWatch

Number Yes Remote Operator Sta-tion Tag for telling theDead man system thatsomeone is set onWatch

Tag4

Tag5: NewAlarm

Number Yes Remote Operator Sta-tion Tag for telling theDead man system thata new alarm is acti-vated.

Tag5

T1: Warn-ing time

Number Yes Time from reset or startuntil warning is acti-vated

20 Min P1

T2: Alarmtime

Number Yes Time from warning isactivated until alarm

150Sec

P2

S1: IMOCompliant

Yes/no Yes Enable check timersaccording to IMO rulesfor machinery deadman system

Yes B1

Tag 4 and 5 areused when the dead man handler is part of theWatchCalling System at the Remote Operator Station. Then the tagpointed to by tag4 is active when the Watch Calling System is setto bridge watch. When an alarm occurs in bridge watch, the tagpointed to by tag5 will be activated, and this will activate the deadman handler in the same way as if tag1 was activated. Decimalpoint is 0.

Maintenance

231AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7 MAINTENANCE

7.1 IntroductionThis chapter explains how to keep the system in good workingorder and what to do if the system fails.


- Overview

- Unit replacement

- Preventive maintenance

- Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations

- Troubleshooting Midi Operator Stations

- Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations

- Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System

- Troubleshooting Distributed Processing Units


232 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.2 OverviewThis maintenance chapter is intended for trained maintenancetechnicians or engineers with experience of electronic and digitalcircuits, computers and electro mechanical design. The level ofinformation is based on Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systemsmaintenance philosophy: The onboard technical personnel shall,with the help of the documentation and the system’s built-in testfunctions, be able to identify malfunctions, locate the fault, andreplace major parts, modules and components on a “LineReplaceable Unit” (LRU) level. He/she will however not attemptto repair the LRUs.

Note Cleaning with abrasive material or strong chemical cleaningsolutions is not recommended as these may damage the system.

7.3 Unit replacement

WARNING Turn power off before replacing any parts!

Note DataChief C20 units are not field repairable. Any attempt willvoid the warranty.

Package faulty units using the box from the replacement unit andsend it to Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems for repair.

→ Refer to page 271 for information on how to get in touch with us.

7.3.1 Recommended toolsDrawings of the installation.

Digital multimeter.

Sensor simulator.

Screwdriver for wire terminals: Flat 3 x 0.7 mm.

Screwdriver for screen termination board: Flat 7 x 1.0 mm.

Screwdriver Pozidriv: POZI #1.

Cable ties.

Maintenance

233AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.4 Preventive maintenance

7.4.1 GeneralKongsberg Maritime Ship Systems recommends thefollowingpreventive maintenance routine for the DataChief C20Alarm and monitoring system with process control and powermanagement:

• Weekly: Clean all operator panels, and run the on-line lamp andunit function tests. Clean all filters for units equipped with fans.

• 6-Monthly: Check cables and cable entrances, electricalscrew-terminals, fuse connections and plug connections.

• Yearly: Check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors andoutput actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

The Classification Societies and/or the Ship’s Maintenance Plan(or Site’s Maintenance Plan) should be referred to for obtaining arecommended preventive maintenance schedule for test ofmeasuring-points and the alarm-system.

Kongsberg Maritime Ship Systems recommends that the operationof each unit and its functions is checked after any majormaintenance. By major maintenance is understood the removing,testing, calibrating and re-installing or replacement of pressuresensors, temperature sensors etc. After this type of maintenance,we recommend each unit to be re-commissioned according to theinstruction given in this manual.

7.4.2 Weekly maintenanceThis maintenance routine applies to units equipped with lampand/or function test buttons. Pushing function test buttons will notinterrupt normal system operation. Do the following:

Remote Operator StationsEach week do the following for each Remote Operator Station:

1 Clean the front of the panel and graphics display unit usinga clean cloth and a solution of warm, mild soapy water - nottoo wet.

2 Push LAMP TEST.

- All alarm group and the SYSTEM FAILURE indicatorsshould be lit and the buzzer turned on for about five seconds.

- If the test fails, refer to the trouble shooting section.3 If the Remote Operator Station is fitted with an external air

filter, clean it.

- Additional preventive maintenance procedures, if any to becarried out as described in the manufacturers manual foreach unit.


234 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Midi Operator Station

Each week do the following for each Midi Operator Station:

1 Clean the surface of the Midi Operator Station and displayscreen. Wipe the surfaces with a clean damp cloth. Forheavier cleaning, use a clean, damp cloth which has beendipped in a solution of a mild dish detergent and water.Wring out firmly before wiping the unit. Never use cleaningsolutions containing spirit or alcohol.

Local Operator Stations

Each week do the following for each Local Operator Station:

1 Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solutionof warm, mild soapy water - not too wet.

2 Push TEST and then ENTER.

- All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on.

3 Push SOUND OFF.

- Use SELECT UP and SELECT DOWN to turn indicatorsand buzzer on and off.

4 Push MENU UP to exit the test.

5 Push SELECT DOWN and ENTER.

6 Push each button and verify that the button function isprinted on the display.

7 Push TEST to exit.

- If the test fails, refer to trouble shooting section.

Watch Calling System

Each week do the following for each Watch Bridge and WatchCabin Unit:

1 Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solutionof warm, mild soapy water - not too wet.

2 Push LAMP TEST.

3 All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on. Thedisplay (if any) should display configuration data.

- If the test fails, refer to the trouble shooting section.

- If one or more LEDs fail to illuminate or the buzzer is silent,replace the unit.

Distributed Processing Units

The distributed processing units do not require weeklymaintenance.

Maintenance

235AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.4.3 6-monthly maintenanceWhere applicable; check the following parts of the system each6-month period:

1 Check cables and cable entrances for dammage to the cable.

2 Tighten all electrical screw-terminals.

3 Tighten all plug connections.

7.4.4 Yearly maintenanceEach year, check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors andoutput actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Ingeneral, it is not necessary to re-calibrate sensors if the input signalis correct. Compare the input signal to this system, with the inputsignals on other systems or local gauges. Sensors can be calibratedin two ways; by calibrating the sensor or the signal itself, or bycalibrating the signal using the software calibration tool built intothe DataChief C20. The calibration software is accessible fromthe “Tag Details” menu on the Remote Operator Station, or fromthe Local Operating Station when available.

Refer to the Classification Societies and/or the Ship’s MaintenancePlan (or Site’s Maintenance Plan) for obtaining a recommendedpreventive maintenance schedule for test of measuring-points andthe alarm-system. The societies normally recommend a 3-monthlyto 6-monthly schedule.


236 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.5 Troubleshooting Remote Operator Stations

7.5.1 How to use the Service consoleprogram

Introduction

Caution The Service console program should only be used by trainedpersonnel. Improper use may seriously degrade the performanceof the DataChief C20 system.

The main functions of Service console are:

• Start Remote Operator Station(s).

• Stop Remote Operator Station(s).

• Copy databases containing the systems configuration data fromRemote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote OperatorStation(s).

• Copy project specific software from Remote Operator Station1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s).

• Copy any selected files.

• Back-up selected project data.

• Restore project data from back-up files.

• Install updates to the system software (service packs) to theRemote Operator Stations.

• Check the status of installed software in selected RemoteOperator Stations against Remote Operator Station 1

Note When installing/copying files the Remote Operator Station copiedto must be stopped.

Maintenance

237AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Explanation to the System Information Display

To start the Service console program go to the System informationdisplay dialog.


238 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Explanation to the main dialog

The following two illustrations briefly explains the main functionsof the main dialog. Consult the operating procedures for step bystep procedures on how to use it.

Maintenance

239AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


240 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Explanation to the Backup dialog

Dialog to specify the type of files and destination for the back-up.

How to start Service console

At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:

1 Push the System Information Display button.

2 Select Service console.

3 Type in the password and push enter.

- The main Service console window is displayed.

How to stop Remote Operator Stations

When installing/copying files the Remote Operator Station copiedto must be stopped. At Remote Operator Station 1 do thefollowing:

1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select RemoteOperator Stations.

2 Push the Stop Station button.

- The selected Remote Operator Stations are stopped.

How to start Remote Operator Stations

After copying files into Remote Operator Station(s), restart it. Atthe Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:

1 Use the trackball and trackball button to select RemoteOperator Stations.

2 Push the Start Station button.

- The selected Remote Operator Stations are started.

Maintenance

241AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

How to copy the database

The following describes how to copy the database from RemoteOperator Station 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). AtRemote Operator Station 1 do the following:

1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select RemoteOperator Station(s).

2 Push the Stop Stations button.

3 Push the Copy Database button.

- The database is copied into the selected Remote OperatorStation(s).

4 Push the Start Stations button.

How to copy project software

The following describes how to copy the project specific softwarefrom Remote Operator Station 1 to selected Remote OperatorStation(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:



3 Push the Copy Project SW button.

- The project specific software is copied into the selectedRemote Operator Station(s).


How to copy files into Remote Operator Stations

The following describes how to copy files from Remote OperatorStation 1 to selected Remote Operator Station(s). At RemoteOperator Station 1 do the following:



3 Push the Copy Files button.

- The Select Files to Copy dialog is displayed.

4 Select the required files and push Open.

- The files are copied into the selected Remote OperatorStation(s).


How to update differences

The following describes how to update file differences betweenRemote Operator Station 1 and the selected Remote OperatorStation(s). At Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:


242 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003



3 Push the Update Diffs button.

- All files with differences from those in Remote OperatorStation 1 are copied into the selected Remote OperatorStation(s).


How to back-up project data

The following describes how to back-up project data from RemoteOperator Station 1 either to a specified path on the hard disk or tofloppy disk. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do the following:

1 Push the Backup button.

- The Backup dialog is displayed.

2 Do one of the following:

* Select a group from the pull-down Filter menu or

* Select the relevant file types under Include.

3 If you want the back-up on floppy disk, insert a disk and pushto disks(A).

4 If you want the back-up to a different path than c:\Ros pushAdvanced and type in the path.

5 Push the Make Backup button.

- The back-up is created as specified.

How to restore project data

The following describes how to restore project data to RemoteOperator Station 1 either from a specified path on the hard disk orfrom floppy disk. At the Remote Operator Station 1 do thefollowing:

1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select all RemoteOperator Stations.


3 Push the Restore button.

- The Restore dialog is displayed.

4 If the back-up is on floppy disk insert it and select the filesto restore.

5 Push the Restore button.

- The files are restored as specified.

Maintenance

243AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

How to install service a service pack

The following describes how to install a service pack on yourDataChief C20. The service pack is installed on all RemoteOperator Stations simultaneously. At the Remote Operator Station1 do the following:

1 Use the trackball and trackball-buttons to select all RemoteOperator Station.


3 Push the Install button.

4 Select the file(s) to install.

- The service pack is unzipped and distributed to all RemoteOperator Stations.


7.5.2 How to set up a Remote OperatorStation from an image file

1 Turn power to the Remote Operator Station off.

2 Put the CD with the Remote Operator Station image file CDinto the CD-ROM reader and the boot floppy disk into thefloppy-drive.

3 Turn power on.

- The image program will then guide you through the processof restoring the software.

Note If the hard disc has defects, it is not possible to restore the RemoteOperator Station from an image file.

How to set up the Local Area Network

Use 3 COM cards for all Local Area Network connections.

1 Install both cards before turning power on.

- This ensures that all Remote Operator Stations get the sameIRQ address for the same network card.

- This means that network cards for network A and B has thesame position on all Remote Operator Stations.

2 Connect a PC keyboard to the Remote Operator Station.

3 Push the Windows button, point to Settings and clickControl panel.

4 Click on Network.

5 Select Protocol tab.


244 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

6 Confirm that Network Protocol is: TCP/IP Protocol

7 Click OK and OK again.

8 Close the Control panel window.

How to set the Remote Operator Station name

To set up a Remote Operator Station in a Network it needs a name.To set up computer name do the following:



3 Click on Network.

4 Select Folder identification tab.

5 Type in the Remote Operator Station name.

- Remote Operator Stations use the following names: ROS1,ROS2, ROS3 etc.

6 In Workgroup, type in ROS.

7 Click Apply, and then click OK and OK again.


How to set the IP address

To set up the Remote Operator Station for dual Local AreaNetwork, a specified IP address must be inserted for each LANcard. Do the following to set the IP address:



3 Click on Network.

4 Select the Protocols tab.

5 Under Adapter select the Local Area Network card youwant to configure. One of these:

- [1] 3 Com Etherlink XL NIC (3C900B-COMBO)

- [2] 3 Com Etherlink XL NIC (3C900B-COMBO)

6 Tick off Specify an IP address.

7 Type in an IP address according to the table below.

8 Type in a Subnet Mask.

Maintenance

245AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

IP--Address LAN A IP--Address LAN B

ROS1 172.17.0.100 172.16.0.100

ROS2 172.17.0.101 172.16.0.101

ROS3 172.17.0.102 172.16.0.102

Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0

9 Click Apply, and then click OK and OK again.


7.5.3 How to shut down a RemoteOperator Station

To avoid malfunctions, follow this procedure:


2 Push the Windows button, point to and click Stop DCC20.

3 Push the Windows button, point to and click Shut Down.

4 Click OK.

5 Power will automatically shut off.

7.5.4 How to replace colour graphicsdisplays

A number of different types and sizes of colour graphics displaysusing both CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) and flat panels can be usedwith the DataChief C20. The display must how ever be able tohandle a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels. Also consider thatthe new display must fit into the space available. Do the following:

1 Make sure the colour graphics display is turned off.

2 Disconnect the power cable and then the data cable.

3 Remove the colour graphics display.

4 Place the new colour graphics display in the place of the oldone.

5 Connect the data cable and then the power cable.

6 Turn the colour graphics display on.

- Confirm that it is working correctly.


246 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.5.5 How to replace printersWe recommend that the replacement printer is of the same makeand model as the old one. However a number of different printerscan be used with the DataChief C20. If you change the type ofprinter used, a new printer driver must be installed in the PCdriving the printer. To do this follow the instructions provided withthe printer. Keep in mind that the new printer must fit into the spaceavailable. Do the following:

1 Make sure the printer is turned off.

2 Disconnect the power cable and then the data cable.

3 Remove the printer.

4 Place the new printer in the place of the old one.

5 Connect the data cable and then the power cable.

6 Turn the printer on.

7 Print any log.

- Confirm that the printer is working correctly.

7.5.6 How to replace Operator ControlPanels

All Operator Control Panels are identical except for the labelsinside the pushbuttons. It is recommended to order replacementpanels with the labels for your configuration already installed. Inyour order specify the ship name or yard and hull number.

It is possible to remove the labels from the defective unit and installthem in the new unit, but as this is difficult we do not recommendit. Do the following:

1 Remove the mounting screws.

2 Lift the panel up.

3 Disconnect the power cable and then the three data cables.

4 Place the new panel in the place of the old one.

5 Connect the three data cables and then the power cable.

6 Put the panel back in it’s place.

7 Mount the screws securely.

8 Test that the Operator Control Panel is working correctly.

7.5.7 How to replace Remote OperatorStation PCs

Replacement PCs must be ordered from us specifying the shipname or yard and hull number, and which of the Remote Operatorstation the PC belongs to (ROS1, ROS2, etc.). We will then set upthe PC with your system configuration and the correct hardwareinterfaces.

Maintenance

247AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

It is possible to configure a PC onboard. This how ever requires aservice or commissioning engineer. Any attempt to do this willvoid the warranty.

Replacement

1 Shut the PC down and turn power off.

2 Disconnect the power cable and then the data cables notingdown exactly where each cable goes.

3 Remove all printed circuit boards in the card slots notingdown exactly where each card goes.

4 Place the new PC in the place of the old one.

5 Install the printed circuit cards in the same locations as in theold PC.

6 Connect the data cables and then the power cable.

7 Turn the PC on.

7.5.8 How to install the RemoteOperator Station software

Use the following procedure when you have replaced the hard diskor when you have re-installed Windows NT.

Note Do not attempt this procedure unless you are very familiar with theWindows operating system.

Before you start any action, verify that you have a disk imageCD-ROM marked DC60052.0x (x is the number of the softwareversion installed in your system) and a service pack located on aset of floppy disks or a CD-ROM marked DC60052.

Install the disk image

The disk image is a CD-ROM containing the software that wasinstalled in your system at commissioning time. Do thefollowing:

1 Connect a standard PC keyboard to the Operator ControlPanel.

2 Insert the disk image CD-ROM, marked DC60052.0x.

3 On the monitor click Start, point to Shut Down, and selectRestart.

- The PC will restart booting from the CD-ROM. The programEasyRestore will automatically start.

4 Answer Yes/OK to questions, and then let the program run.

- After about ten minutes you will be asked to restart the PC.


248 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

5 Answer Yes/OK.

Set the LAN address and computer name

Remote Operator Stations use the following computer namesand Local Area Network addresses:

Computer name LAN IP addressAdapter 1/LAN A

LAN IP addressAdapter 2/LAN B

ROS 1 172.17.0.100 172.16.0.100

ROS 2 172.17.0.101 172.16.0.101

ROS 3 172.17.0.102 172.16.0.102

ROS 4 172.17.0.103 172.16.0.103

...

Do the following:

6 On the monitor click My Computer, and then click ControlPanel.

7 Double-click on Network, and then click the Protocols tab.

8 Click Properties, select each network adapter and set the IPaddress according to the table above.

9 When finished, click OK.

10 Click the Identification tab, and then Change.

11 Modify the computer name to ROSn (where n is the numberof this Remote Operator Station), click OK.

12 Click OK again.

13 When asked to reboot, answer Yes.

- The Remote Operator Station will reboot.

14 If you experience problems with the desktop shortcuts forStart-up DCC20, Shutdown DCC20, or RioLoad seeWhat to do if you have problems with desktop shortcutsbelow.

Install the latest service pack

The service pack is located on a set of floppy disks or on aCD-ROM marked DC60052. It consists of a number ofself-extracting zip files. As an example, service packDC60052.07.003 consists of the following files:

* DC60052_07_003_disk#1.exe

* DC60052_07_003_disk#2.exe

* DPU 3.02 disk #1.exe

Maintenance

249AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003




How to install the latest service pack is described under “How touse the Service console earlier in this chapter.

Copy ship specific files and databases

How to copy ship specific files and databases is described under“How to use the Service console earlier in this chapter.

Testing the Remote Operator station

Do the following to verify that the Remote Operator Station is nowworking correctly:

15 Double-clicking the Startup DCC20 icon.

16 Verify that all items specified in the case ROSn section ofthe startup script starts without error messages.

17 Verify that the CAN Interface Server (CIS) starts and loadsthe new configuration data into all Distributed ProcessingUnits it is responsible for.

What to do if you have problems with desktopshortcuts

When changing the computer name of a PC running Windows NT,you may experience problems with shortcuts on the desktop, suchas Startup DCC20, Shutdown DCC20, or RioLoad. Typically,when you double-click on an icon, nothing happens. To solve theproblem do the following for each problem icon:

18 Right-click on the shortcut, select Properties.

19 Select the Shortcut tab.

20 In the Target field, replace \\ROS1\c withC:\ROS\config\Bin\....

21 In the Start in field, replace \\ROS1\c withC:\ROS\config\Bin\....


250 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.6 How to install the Midi Operator StationWARNING The Midi operator Station is sealed and

contains no user serviceable parts. Opening theunit will void the warranty. If the glass in thescreen breaks, be carefull not to cut yourself onthe sharp edges of the glass pieces.

7.6.1 Placement

Figure 135 Midi Operator Station mounting.

Determine the most suitable and convenient place for operationafter considering the following conditions:

* There is limited exposure to direct sunlight to avoidoverheating.

→ Refer to the requirements on page 44 for suitable ambianttemperatures

* There is good ventilation and minimum vibration.

* The minimum distance to a magnetic compass is 500mm(20”).

* Sufficient space behind the unit is available to allowproper cable connections to the rear panel connectors.

Maintenance

251AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.6.2 CutoutFor flushmount installations use the following cutout.

13595 ø2.5

4pcs

132

243

240

230

Figure 136 MOS 33 cutout drawing.


252 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.6.3 Electrical connections

Power supply connection

* The internal voltage regulator will allow the MidiOperator Station (MOS 33) to operate normally withinthe power supply voltage range from 10 to 32 V DC. A24 volt power supply is however recommended. The MidiOperator Station is connected to external power throughthe terminal list. The cable length between the terminallist and the Midi Operator Station is approximately 2meters. After connecting the cable to the power source,push the plug as far as it will go into the nine pinreceptacle marked PWR on the rear of the cabinet andturn the plug’s coupling ring clockwise until it makes aclick.

MOS33

Terminal list

Figure 137 MOS 33 connection drawing.

Fuse

Note A 4.0 Amp slow fuse should always be installed to protect the unit.

CAN bus interface connection

* The CAN bus connection is also made through theterminal list. Make sure to connect using the correctpolarity. Also make sure the end (CAN) terminatorsupplied with the unit stays in place.

Maintenance

253AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.7 Troubleshooting Midi Operator StationsWARNING The Midi operator Station is sealed and

contains no user serviceable parts. Opening theunit will void the warranty. If the glass in thescreen breaks, be carefull not to cut yourself onthe sharp edges of the glass pieces.

7.7.1 Troubleshooting checklist

Symptom Check RemedyNo picture on displayscreen.

Check that thesupply voltage isbetween 10 – 32VDC.

Faultfind supplyvoltage.

Check fuse in powercable fuse holder.

Replace fuse. Useslow type 4.0A slow.

Picture appears onthe display screen,but image is too darkor too bright.

Adjust light/ contrast.

No normal picture orkey operation.

Disconnect powerand connect poweragain.Replace unit.

7.7.2 How to replace Midi OperatorStations

Note Never replace more than one Midi Operator Station at a time!

Do the following:

1 If the unit is flush mounted remove the corners.

2 Remove mounting screws.

3 Lift the panel out.

4 Disconnect the cables.

5 Replace the unit.

6 Connect the cables.

7 Replace mounting screws securely.

8 Replace corners if these where removed.

Note Configuration can only be done at the master Remote OperatorStation.

9 On the Remote Operator Station, push System Info Display.

10 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Replace Modules andpush Enter.

- The prompt Enter Password is displayed.


254 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

11 Type in the password: *****

Note For error detection and replacement purposes the Midi OperatorStation is treated as a DPU (Distributed Processing Unit).

12 Under DPUs with COMM error, select the failed MidiOperator Station and push Install Replacement DPU.

-

- After a few moments the system indicates SuccessfullyReplaced DPU. The alarm related to the failing unitdisappears.

13 Confirm that the Midi Operator Panel is working correctlythtrough operational use.

Maintenance

255AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.8 Troubleshooting Local Operator Stations

7.8.1 Troubleshooting flow diagramTo troubleshooting the Local Operator Station use the followingflow diagrams to determine the problem:

Is theSYSTEM FAILindicator lit?

Replace the fuse orreset the circuit

braker.

Start LOStroubleshooting

Yes

Disconnect and thenreconnect power.

Does theLOS

operate?

Checkthe LOS again. Still

failed?Contact us for assistance.

Replace the unit.

The wiring haswrong polarity.

Correct the wiring.

END

No

Green

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Check24volt power input. Is

power OK?No

Check theterminal board

inside the mountingframe. Check LED

indicator?

Red

Yes

Doesthe LOS operate?

Yes

No

Dark

Figure 138 Local Operator Station troubleshooting flowdiagram.


If you remove the mounting frame to check inside, power must beturned “ON” to check LED indicator, etc. Take care not to touchexposed terminal boards and components!

Caution Against equipment damage


256 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

To protect the front of the panel when dismounted, place the panelfront downwards onto a soft cloth.

7.8.2 How to replace Local OperatorStations

All Local Control Stations are identical, no configuration isrequired. Do the following:



3 Unscrew and remove the left side cover plate.

4 Slide the top panel out.

5 Disconnect the cable.

6 Connect the cable for the new unit.

7 Slide it into place - be careful not to dammage the cable.

8 Mount the side cover and screws securely.

9 Test that the Local Operator Panel is working correctly.

7.8.3 How to recommision a LocalOperator Station

- No manual recommissioning is necessary after replacing aLocal Operator Station.

- The Local Operator Station will check the network andestablish contact with the available Distributed ProcessingUnits automatically.

Maintenance

257AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.9 Troubleshooting the Watch Calling System

7.9.1 Troubleshooting flow diagramsThe troubleshooting of the Watch Bridge and Watch Cabin Unitsare identical. Use the following flow diagrams to determine theproblem:

Is theROS working

correctly?Troubleshoot the ROS.

Start Watch CallingSystem troubleshooting

Yes

Check the mimic displayWatch Calling

configuration 1 of 2.

Do you havecommunication with all

WBU/WCU units?

Does theWBU/WCU panels

operate?

Checkthe WCS again. Still

failed?

Contact us for assistance.

Troubleshoot the WBU/WCU unit using the next

troubleshooting flowdiagram.

Check the ROS interfaceboard to the CAN bus. If

OK, troubleshoot theCAN network cables .

END

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Figure 139 Watch Calling System troubleshooting flowdiagram.


258 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Is theSYSTEM FAILindicator lit?

Replace the fuse orreset the circuit

braker.

Start WBU/WCUtroubleshooting

Yes

Check the mimicdisplay Watch Callingconfiguration 1 of 2.

Does theWBU/WCU

operate?

Checkthe WCS again. Still

failed?Contact us for assistance.

Replace the unit.

The wiring haswrong polarity.

Correct the wiring.

END

No

Green

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Check24volt power input. Is

power OK?No

Check theterminal board

inside the mountingframe. Check LED

indicator?

Red

Yes

Doesthe WBU/WCU

operate?

Yes

No

Dark

Figure 140 Watch Bridge or Watch Cabin Unit troubleshootingflow diagram.


If you remove the mounting frame to check inside, power must beturned “ON” to check LED indicators, etc. Take care not to touchexposed terminal boards and components!

Caution Against equipment damage

To protect the front of the panel when dismounted, place the panelfront downwards onto a soft cloth.

Maintenance

259AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.9.2 How to replace Watch Callingunits

There are two types of Watch Bridge Units and two types of WatchCabin Units. For each type all panels are identical exept for thelabels inside the pushbuttons. It is recommended to orderreplacement panels with the labels for your configuration alreadyinstalled. In your order specify the ship name or yard and hullnumber.

It ispossible to remove the labels fromthedefectiveunit and installthem in the new unit, but as this is difficult we do not recommendit.

Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as“belonging” to that engineer-position. These are the panels inhis/her cabin, office and in public areas. When an engineer is Onduty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode.

Replacement



3 Unscrew and remove the left side cover plate.

4 Slide the top panel out.

5 Disconnect the cable.

6 Note down the LMT address for both the old and the newunit.

- Each watch calling panel has a unique ID, called an LMTaddress. This address is either found on a label placed on theside of the panel and looks like this:

Figure 141 Label with LMT address

- The LMT address is placed at the bottom of the label, in thiscase NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000008453.

- If this label is missing, there should be a smaller label placedon the bottom of the panel or inside the panel looking likethis:


260 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 142 Label with last part of LMT address

- The number written at the bottom of the label is last part ofthe LMT address, in this case 8453, indicating that the LMTaddress is NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000008453.

- If you have a watch calling panel with an LCD display, youcan also find the LMT address by pushing LAMP TEST(power must be connected). The LMT address is displayedin line 3 on the LCD display.

7 Connect the cable for the new unit.

8 Slide it into place - be careful not to dammage the cable.

9 Mount the side cover and screws securely.

Configuration

WARNING The following should only be done by trainedpersonnel.

Note Configuration can only be done from the master Remote OperatorStation.

10 Find the wcall.ini file using the the Windows Explorer.

- It isnormally located in theC:\\Ros\Config\Database folder.

11 Double-click the file to open it using the Notepad.

12 Look for a section named Panels that looks something likethis:

[Panels]

Panel1=1,NORCTRLWCPANEL00000000005382



Figure 143 Figure 1.3 The panels section of the wcall.ini file.

13 Locate the LMT address for the panel you replaced.

14 Replace this LMT address with the LMT address of the newpanel.

15 Save the wcall.ini file.

Maintenance

261AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

16 Copy the file to the other Remote Operator Stations asfollows:

→ Refer to page 240 for How to start the Service console.

→ Refer to page 241 for How to copy files into Remote OperatorStations.

17 Each DataChief C20 Remote Operator Station must bestopped and started again for the changes to take effect.

→ Refer to page 240 for How to stop the Remote Operator Stations.

→ Refer to page 240 for How to start Remote Operator Stations.

18 Test that the Watch Calling unit is working correctly


262 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.10 Troubleshooting Distributed ProcessingUnits

7.10.1 How to handle DistributedProcessing Units error codes

All Distributed Processing Units have Built In Self-Test. Thesereport errors to the Remote Operator Stations on the systemchannel.

- The following table gives an overview of the error codes andappropriate actions:

Errorcode

Error description Action

49 RAM fail Replace the module.

48 Transmitter overcurrent (RAi16and C1 modules)

Check all channels forhigh current load.

47 Fuse fail (RDi32 and C1 mod-ules)

Check all inputs.

46 Printed circuit board temperaturehigh

Check the ambient tem-perature.

45 Parameter flash memory failure Reset the module andtry again. If failing again,replace the module.

CAN 1 -- plug X8:

40 CAN controller busoff

39 CAN controller error status set

38 CAN controller overrun

37 Rx queue overrun Check CAN connections

36 HP Tx queue overrun

35 LP Tx queue overrun

34 Transmit fault

CAN 2 -- plug X9:

30 CAN controller busoff

29 CAN controller error status set

28 CAN controller overrun

27 Rx queue overrun Check CAN connections

26 HP Tx queue overrun

25 LP Tx queue overrun

24 Transmit fault

Maintenance

263AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

7.10.2 How to handle DistributedProcessing Units communicationerrors

When the Remote Operator Station gives a communication errorfor one of the Distributed Processing Units. Do the following:

1 Locate the Distributed Processing Unit.

2 Check LED power and status indicators.

Figure 144 LED power indicator. Green indicates that power isavailable and red that the power has wrong polarity.

Figure 145 LED status indicators.

3 Read the status for each indicator above and check it againstthe table below.

LED indicators

Fault type:Run Watch

dogInfo. End Init. Power

Normaloperation

Green Dark Flashingyellow

Green Green

No applica-tion loaded

Dark Red Dark Green Green

Not initialised Dark Red Dark Dark Green

Applicationstopped

Dark Red Dark Green Green


264 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Power haswrong polarity

Dark Dark Dark Dark Red

No power Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark

4 Follow the action for the fault you found as described below.

Normal operation

Indicators lit: Run (Green), Info. (flashing yellow), End Init.(green) and Power (green).

- The unit seems to be working OK.

1 Check the cabling.

2 Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again.

3 It the Remote Operator Station is still reporting an errorreplace the module. See procedure below.

No application loaded

Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red), End Init. (green) and Power(green).

1 Return the item to us.

Not initialised

Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red) and Power (green)

1 Reload the application from a Remote Operator Station.

2 If the the same indicators are still lit, replace the module. Seeprocedure below.

Application stopped

Indicators lit: Watch Dog (red) and End Init (green)

1 Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again.

2 If the Watch Dog indicator is still lit replace the module. Seeprocedure below.

Power connected with wrong polarity

Indicators lit: Power (red)

1 Correct the power polarity and check again.

2 If the Power indicator is still red, replace the module. Seeprocedure below.

No power

Indicators lit: None

Maintenance

265AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1 Check power supply and wiring.

2 If the power supply and wiring is OK, replace the module.See procedure below.

7.10.3 How to start or stop RemoteOperator Stations

Caution Only to be used by trained personnel. The functionality foundhere will allow you to stop the complete Alarm and monitoringsystem with process control and power management!


2 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Start DC modulesandpush Enter.



- The following window is displayed.

4 From the list, select the Remote Operator Station you wantto start or stop.

5 Under Start/Stop Stations push the appropriate button.

- Run State will indicate the status of the selected unit.

Figure 146 Window for starting or stopping of RemoteOperator Stations.

7.10.4 How to configure a new DPUchannel

Use the following procedure to add an alarm channel to theDataChief C20.


266 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

1 Find a DPU (Distributed Processing Unit) with a sparechannel of the correct type.

In the engine-room

2 Wire the sensor to the spare channel.

At the remote operator station

3 Push the System Info Display button.

4 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Unit Display (if notalready selected) and push Enter.

- The prompt Enter unit number: is displayed on the lowerleft side of the colour graphics display.

5 Type in the number of the selected DPU and push Enter.

- The information about the selected DPU is displayed

6 Use the up/down arrow keys to select the spare channel.

7 Push the Tag details button.

8 Select the Advanced tag details tab using the trackball.

9 Select tag description.

10 Enter the commissioning password: *****

11 Push Enter.

12 Change the tag description to give it a relevant name for thenew alarm.

For analogue channels

13 Under the Advanced Tag Details tab change for example:

* Engineering unit type

* Engineering unit high

* Engineering unit low

14 Under the Tag Details tab change for example:

* Logs, delays and alarm limits as relevant.

Maintenance

267AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 147 Advanced tag details for an analog channel.

Figure 148 Tag details for an analog channel.

For digital channels

15 Under the Tag Details tab change for example:

* Logs and delays


268 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Figure 149 Advanced tag details for an digital channel.

Figure 150 Tag details for an digital channel.

Disable commissioning access16 When finished push the System Info Display button.

17 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Commissioning andpush Enter.

- The prompt Enter 0 to disable commissioning access: isdisplayed on the lower left side of the colour graphicsdisplay.

Maintenance

269AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

18 Type in 0 and push Enter.

- Commissioning status changes from Yes to No.

7.10.5 How to replace DistributedProcessing Units

Note Never replace more than one DPU unit at a time!

All DPUs look very similar. Make sure the replacement unit is ofexactly the same type as the failing unit. Type specification isavailable on the label for each unit. Do the following:

1 Remove the screws for the termination bracket.

2 Disconnect all connectors.


Figure 151 Electrical disconnection.

Figure 152 Mechanical disconnection.

4 Install the replacement unit.


270 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


6 Use the up/down arrow keys to select Replace Modules andpush Enter.


7 Type in the password: *****

8 Under DPUs with COMM error, select the failed unit andpush Install Replacement DPU.

- After a few moments the system indicates SuccessfullyReplaced DPU. The alarm related to the failing unitdisappears.

9 Confirm that the DPU is working correctly.

Replaceable parts

271AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

8 REPLACEABLE PARTS

8.1 IntroductionThis chapter contains a list of spare parts available for theDataChief C20 including part numbers. Not all parts are listedher, only those defined as Line Replaceable Units (LRU) to bechanged by on-board maintenance personnel. Information onconfiguration settings is also included.

8.2 How to get in touch with usShould you need to get in touch with us for any reason use thefollowing addressing information:

Kongsberg Maritime Ship SystemsBekkajordet 8 AP.O. Box 1009N-3194 Horten, NORWAY

Telephone switchboard: +47 33 03 20 00Telephone 24 hours service: +47 91 52 80 82Fax: +47 85 02 80 82E-mail for service: [email protected] for spare parts: [email protected]

8.3 Consumable spare PartsAir filter for Remote Operator Station 2603925

PC fan for Remote Operator Station 3900282

Box printer paper 2500 sheet A4-size 1200002

8.4 ModulesMOS33 - Midi Operator Station 4403239

WBU - LCD type with 6 alarm groups 8100114

WBU - LED type with 16 alarm groups 8100131

WCU - LCD type with 6 alarm groups 8100138

WCU - LED type with 16 alarm groups 8100141

RAi-16 - Remote Analogue input module 8100148

RAi-10TC - Remote Analogue input thermo coupler 8100161

RDi-32 - Remote Digital input module 8100154


272 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

RDi-32a - Remote Digital input module 8100172

RAo-8 - Remote Analogue output module 8100153

RDo-16 - Remote Digital output module 8100155

RIo-C1 - Remote Input Output module 8100181

RIo-C2 - Remote Input Output module 8100182

RIo-C3-GP - Generator Protection 8100251

RIo-C3-GDCP - Generator & Diff. Current Protection 8100225

RIo-C4 - Generator Protection module 8100226

VCC 440 - Voltage Converter Controller module 8100242

dPSC - Dual Process Segment Controller 8100183

PSS - Process Segment StarCoupler 8100184

LOS - Local Operator Station 8100158

UPS SMPS 700 V 220vac/24vdc 28A 3800248

UPS 220vac / 24vdc 10 A for cabinet montage 3800334

UPS 220/220vac 50/60Hz 780VA Eltech, Pulsar 3800351

UPS 220/220vac 50/60Hz 1080VA Eltech, Pulsar 3800352

8.5 Plugs and accessories4 Pole connector 3401038

5 Pole connector 3401191





12Pole connector 3401290

Cross connection link for power and CAN 3100295

Termination resistor 120 ohm 5100091

8.6 Other spare parts

Colour graphics display

A number of different types and sizes of colour graphics displayscan be used with the DataChief C20. The minimum requirementsto these are:

Replaceable parts

273AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

• Screen resolution: 1024 x 768 pixels

To order a replacement unit specify the following information:

• Colour graphics display size (17”, 19”, 21” or bigger both CRTand flat screen types are available).

Remote Operator Station computer

The personal computer unit forming part of the Remote OperatorStation is loaded with DataChief C20 system software andconfiguration software unique for each vessel. To order areplacement unit specify the following information:

• Vessel name.

• Ship yard name.

• Hull number.

• Where located on the ship

8.7 Configuration settingsThere are no hardware configuration settings such as dip switchesfor any of the modules.


274 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

8.8 DrawingsThis chapter contains drawings refered to in other parts of themanual:

- Local Operator Station

- Midi Operator Station

- Watch Bridge Unit

- Watch Cabin Unit

- RAi-16 - Remote Analogue input module

- RAi-10TC - Remote Analogue input thermo coupler

- RDi-32 - Remote Digital input module

- RDi-32a - Remote Digital input module

- RAo-8 - Remote Analogue output module

- RDo-16 - Remote Digital output module

- RIo-C1 - Remote Input Output module

- RIo-C2 - Remote Input Output module

- RIo-C3 - Generator protection module

- dPSC - Dual Process Segment Controller

Replaceable parts

275AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 6W maximumUnit weight: 1.4kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

Note:Rotate end covers 180 deg. to change between flush andwall mounting. Use countersunk head screws.

Local Operator Station,Watch Bridge Unit &Watch Cabin Unit


276 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: through plugSupply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DCConsumption: 10 W maximumUnit weight: 1.0kgTemperature range: -15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

MOS33 Midi Operator Station

Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: Through plugSupply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DCConsumption: 10W maximumUnit weight: 1.5 kgTemperature range: -10 Deg. C to +50 Deg. C

Replaceable parts

277AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003


Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit -- do not disconnect the cables.

Unscrew and rotate the label to change the readingdirection.

RAi--16 Remote Analogue input module


278 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 10W maximumUnit weight: 1.8 kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C



RAi--10tc Remote Analogue input module

Replaceable parts

279AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003




RDi--32 & 32a Remote Digital input module


280 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003




RAo--8 Remote Analogue output module

Replaceable parts

281AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003




RDo--16 Remote Digital output module


282 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003




RIO--C1 Remote Input Output module

Replaceable parts

283AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003




RIO--C2 Remote Input Output module


284 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 15 W maximumUnit weight: 2.0 kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C



RIO--C3 Generator protection

Replaceable parts

285AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 -- 32 V DCConsumption: 15 W maximumUnit weight: 2.0 kgTemperature range: --15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C



RIO--C4 Generator monitoring and control


286 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003




VCC Voltage Converter Controller

Replaceable parts

287AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Mounting screws: M5Cable connections: 2.5 mm 2 screw terminalsSupply Voltage: 18 - 32 V DCConsumption: 15W maximumUnit weight: 1.6 kgTemperature range: -15 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C

Note:Unscrew shield termination bracket and plugs whenreplacing the unit - do not disconnect the cables.


dPSC Dual Process Segment Controller


288 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

9 APPENDIX

9.1 IntroductionThis appendix contains definitions, abbreviations and referencesused in this document.


- Abbreviations

- References

Appendix

289AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

9.2 Abbreviations

9.2.1 GeneralAC Alternating CurrentBIST Built In System TestCAN Control Area NetworkCE Communite EuropeenCD Compact DiscCCR Cargo Control RoomdPSC Dual Process Segment ControllerDC DataChiefDPU Distributed Processing UnitECR Engine Control RoomEMC Electro Magnetic CompatibilityEMD European union Maritime DirectorateGUI Graphic User InterfaceIACS International Assocciation of Class SocietiesIMO International Maritime OrganisationI/O Input/OutputIFH Instrument Failure High alarmIFL Instrument Failure Low alarmIP Ingress ProtectionKMSS Kongsberg Maritime Ship SystemsLAN Local area NetworkLAS Local Alarm SystemLCD Liquid Crystal DisplayLED Light Emitting DiodeLOS Local Operator StationLRU Line Replaceable UnitMCU Main Computer UnitNC Normal ClosedNO Normal OpenOCP Operator Control PanelPC Personal ComputerPCB Printed Circuit BoardPDO Process Data ObjectPDS Process Data SegmentPLC Programmable Logic ControllerPMS Power Management SystemPSS Process Segment StarcouplerRAi Remote Analogue Input unitRAi tc Remote Analogue Input unit for termo couplers


290 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

RAO Remote Analogue Output unitRDI Remote Digital Input unitRDO Remote Digital Output unitROS Remote Operator StationSGW System GatewayUMS Unmanned Machinery SpaceUPS Uninterruptible Power SupplyUTC Coordinated Universal TimeWBU Watch Bridge UnitWCU Watch Cabin Unit

9.2.2 Alarm list abbreviationsThe following is a list of abbreviations used in alarm list inRemote- and Local Operator Stations.

Analogue sensors

OffSc Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is notchecked for alarm situations and is not measured anymore.

Grad Gradient alarm. The input signal is changing rapidly.

Low Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than a setlimit.

Lo-Lo Low-Low alarm. When the input signal is lower thana set limit.

High High alarm. When the input signal is higher than a setlimit.

Hi-Hi High-High alarm. When the input signal is lower thana set limit.

IFL Instrument failure low alarm. Used for example whena 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving less than 4 mA.

IFH Instrument failure high alarm. Used for example whena 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving more than 20 mA.

Inhib Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoidunnecessary alarms such as when the main engine isstopped.

Digital sensors

OffSc Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is notchecked for alarm situations.

Open The switch is open, such as ”valve open”

Closed The switch is closed, such as ”valve closed”

Appendix

291AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Short The wiring to the sensor has a short-circuit

Broken The wiring to the sensor has a open-circuit

Inhib Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoidunnecessary alarms such as when the main engine isstopped.


292 AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

9.3 ReferencesDataChief C20Alarm and monitoring systemInstruction manualDocument number: AD-0376Item number: 0400150

DataChief C20Alarm and monitoring system with process controlInstruction manualDocument number: AD-0378Item number: 0400152

DataChief C20Alarm and monitoring system with power managementInstruction manualDocument number: AD-0379Item number: 0400153

DataChief C20Alarm and monitoring system with process control and powermanagementInstruction manualDocument number: AD-0377Item number: 0400151

Instruction manual

293AD-0377 / Rev C 13.02.2003

Blank page

Dat

aChi

ef

C20

/Ins

truc

tion

man

ual

294

AD

-037

7/R

evC

13.0

2.20

03

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

DataC

hiefC20

Instructionmanual

Alarm

andmonitoringsystem

with

processcontroland

powermanagem

ent

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

DataC

hiefC20

Instructionmanual

Alarm

andmonitoringsystem

with

processcontroland

powermanagem

ent

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

DataC

hiefC20

Instructionmanual

Alarm

andmonitoringsystem

with

processcontroland

powermanagem

ent

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

____

Blank page

Document printing instructions

This page and all pages hereafter are not part ofthe manual and should not be printed!

1 The whole document including the front page is asingle PDF-file with the document number AD-0377.

2 Print the front page in colour.

3 The rest of the document should be printed in black& white, 2-sided printing.

4 References is the last section that is part of thedocument, after that there is various usefulinformation not normally printed.

5 The sheet before this one contains labels for thespine of binders.

6 The following page(s) containing “TAGS” is used forinternal document updating purposes only.

Tags - DO NOT PRINT!

Kilde: Library I7 -Ansvar: Kjell GrøntoftDokument historie:01.02.2002 releasedBrukt:AD-0377 DataChief C20reg.no bokVersion: IngenAndre attributter i bruk: IngenDataChief C20 AMSDenne siden innehloder alle tags som er brukt i manualen.1 Functional description2 Getting started3 Operating information4 Reference guide5 Maintenance6 Replaceable parts7 Appendix

Filnavn Nivå Tag Kommentar


Intro 1 c20_funcdes_01 Introduction

3 c20_funcdes_02 MOS tech spec.

Getting started

Intro 1 c20_getstrt_01 Introduction

ROS 3 c20_getstrt_02 Understanding the Re-mote Operator Stationdisplay.

c20_getstrt_03 Access levels MOS


Intro 1 c20_operate_01 Introduction

ROS 3 c20_operate_02 How to access theWatch Calling configur-ation.

3 c20_operate_03 How to enable resettingof counters

3 c20_operate_04 How to display systeminformation

3 c20_operate_05 How to change timezone

3 c20_operate_06 How to change tagparameters for an ana-logue channel

3 c20_operate_07 How to change tagparameters for a digitalchannel

3 c20_operate_08 How to set the intervallfor selected points log

3 c20_operate_09 How to change tagparameters


1 c20_pcs_01 Introduction


1 c20_pms_01 Introduction

Reference Guide

Intro 1 c20_refguid_01 Introduction

3 c20_refguid_02 Exhaust mean value tagitems

Maintenance

Intro 1 c20_maint_01 Introduction

4 c20_maint_02 How to start Serviceconsole

4 c20_maint_03 How to copy files intoRemote Operator Sta-tions.

4 c20_maint_04 How to stop RemoteOperator Stations

4 c20_maint_05 How to start RemoteOperator Stations

Replaceable parts

Intro 1 c20_parts_01 Introduction

Appendix

Intro 1 c20_append_01 Introduction

Alarm Monitoring Control and Power Management

Documents

victim flat

high voltages

highvoltage power supplies

onhighvoltage equipment

ifthe voltage

thevictims heart

victims life

kgr aho kopc